Part Number Hot Search : 
56GP210 CY7C109 2SC517 CDSV2 STF1016C GRM21BR HDMS3224 H8S2168
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download M38D23G2XXXHP Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 38D2 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
DESCRIPTION The 38D2 Group is the 8-bit microcomputer based on the 740 Family core technology. The 38D2 Group is pin-compatible with the 38C2 Group. The 38D2 Group has an LCD drive control circuit, an A/D converter, a serial interface, and a ROM correction function and on-chip oscillator as additional functions. The QzROM version and the flash memory version are available. The flash memory version does not have a selection function for the oscillation start mode. Only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The various microcomputers include variations of memory size, and packaging. For details, refer to the section on part numbering. FEATURES * Basic machine-language instructions ................................. 71 * The minimum instruction execution time ................... 0.32 s (at 12.5 MHz oscillation frequency) * Memory size (QzROM version) ROM ........................................................ 16 K to 60 K bytes RAM ........................................................... 640 to 2048 bytes * Memory size (Flash memory version) ROM ...................................................................... 60 K bytes RAM ...................................................................... 2048 bytes * Programmable input/output ports .. 51 (common to SEG: 24) * Interrupts ............................................. 18 sources, 16 vectors * Timers ..................................................... 8-bit x 4, 16-bit x 2 * Serial interface ....... 8-bit x 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized) * PWM .......... 10-bit x 2, 16-bit x 1 (common to IGBT output) * A/D converter .......................................... 10-bit x 8 channels (A/D converter can be operated in low-speed mode.) * Watchdog timer ......................................................... 8-bit x 1 * ROM correction function ....................... 32 bytes x 2 vectors * LED direct drive port ............................................................ 8 (average current: 15 mA, peak current: 30 mA, total current: 90 mA) * LCD drive control circuit Bias ............................................................................ 1/2, 1/3 Duty .............................................................................. 2, 3, 4 Common output .................................................................... 4 Segment output ................................................................... 24 * Main clock generating circuit ............................................... 1 (connect to external ceramic resonator or on-chip oscillator) * Sub-clock generating circuit ..................................................1 (connect to external quartz-crystal oscillator)
REJ03B0177-0302 Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 * Power source voltage (QzROM version) [In frequency/2 mode] f(XIN) 12.5 MHz.............................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 2 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In frequency/4 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In frequency/8 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 1.8 to 5.5 V [In low-speed mode].............................................. 1.8 to 5.5 V Note. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the fre* Power source voltage (Flash memory version) [In frequency/2 mode] f(XIN) 12.5 MHz.............................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 4 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In frequency/4 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In frequency/8 mode] f(XIN) 16 MHz................................................. 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz................................................... 2.7 to 5.5 V [In low-speed mode].............................................. 2.7 to 5.5 V Note. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the fre* Power dissipation (QzROM version) * In frequency/2 mode ..................................... Typ. 32 mW (VCC = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) * In low-speed mode ........................................ Typ. 18 W (VCC = 2.5 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) * Power dissipation (Flash memory version) * In frequency/2 mode ..................................... Typ. 20 mW (VCC = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) * In low-speed mode ...................................... Typ. 1.1 mW (VCC = 2.7 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) * Operating temperature range ............................... -20 to 85C Flash Memory Mode * Program/Erase voltage ............................. VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V * Program method ....................... Programming in unit of byte * Erase method .................................................... Block erasing * Program/Erase control by software command
quency/2 mode. quency/2 mode.
APPLICATION Household products, Consumer electronics, etc.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 1 of 131
38D2 Group
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P04/SEG 4 P05/SEG5 P06/SEG6 P07/SEG7 P10/SEG8 P11/SEG9 P12/SEG10 P13/SEG11 P14/SEG12 P15/SEG13 P16/SEG14 P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16 P21/SEG17 P22/SEG18 P23/SEG19
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
M38D2XGXFP/HP M38D29FFFP/HP
P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6)
RESET P62/XCOUT P61/XCIN VSS XIN XOUT VCC P60/CNTR1 P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7)
P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3 P42/ADKEY/AN2 P41/OOUT1/AN1 P40/OOUT0/AN0 OSCSEL (Note 1)
Note 1: CNVSS in flash memory version
Package type : PLQP0064GA-A(64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A(64P6Q-A)
Fig. 1 Pin configuration (LQFP Package)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 2 of 131
38D2 Group
Table 1
Performance overview
Parameter Function 71 0.32 s (Minimum instruction, Oscillation frequency 12.5 MHz) 16 MHz (Maximum)(1) ROM RAM 16 K to 60 K bytes 640 to 2048 bytes 60 K bytes 2048 bytes 8-bit x 6, 3-bit x 1 (24 pins sharing SEG) 18 sources, 16 vectors (includes key input interrupt) 8-bit x 4, 16-bit x 2 8-bit x 2 (UART or Clock-synchronized) 10-bit x 2, 16-bit x 1 (common to IGBT output) 10-bit x 8 (operated in low-speed mode) 8-bit x 1 32 bytes x 2 vectors 8 (average current: 15 mA, peak current: 30 mA, total current: 90 mA) Bias Duty Common output Segment output 1/2, 1/3 2, 3, 4 4 24 Built-in (connect to external ceramic resonator or on-chip oscillator) Built-in (connect to external quartz-crystal oscillator) f(XIN) 12.5 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz f(XIN) 4 MHz f(XIN) 2 MHz In frequency/4 mode f(XIN) 16 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz f(XIN) 4 MHz In frequency/8 mode f(XIN) 16 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz f(XIN) 4 MHz In low-speed mode 4.0 to 5.5 V 2.0 to 5.5 V 1.8 to 5.5 V 4.5 to 5.5 V 2.0 to 5.5 V 1.8 to 5.5 V 4.5 to 5.5 V 2.0 to 5.5 V 1.8 to 5.5 V 1.8 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 12.5 MHz 4.5 to 5.5 V f(XIN) 8 MHz f(XIN) 4 MHz In frequency/4 mode In frequency/8 mode In low-speed mode f(XIN) 16 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz f(XIN) 16 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz 4.0 to 5.5 V 2.7 to 5.5 V 4.5 to 5.5 V 2.7 to 5.5 V 4.5 to 5.5 V 2.7 to 5.5 V 2.7 to 5.5 V Std. 32 mW (Vcc = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) Std. 18 W (Vcc = 2.5 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) Std. 20 mW (Vcc = 5 V, f(XIN) = 12.5 MHz, Ta = 25C) Std. 1.1 mW (Vcc = 2.7 V, f(XIN) = stop, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz, Ta = 25C) VCC 10 mA -20 to 85C CMOS silicon gate 64-pin plastic molded LQFP
Number of basic instructions Instruction execution time Oscillation frequency Memory sizes (QzROM version)
ROM Memory sizes (Flash memory version) RAM I/O port Interrupt Timer Serial Interface PWM A/D converter Watchdog timer ROM correction function LED direct drive port LCD drive control circuit P0-P5, P60-P62
Main clock generating circuits Sub-clock generating circuits Power source voltage (QzROM version) In frequency/2 mode
(1)
Power source voltage In frequency/2 mode (Flash memory version) (1)
Power dissipation (QzROM version)
In frequency/2 mode In low-speed mode
In frequency/2 mode Power dissipation (Flash memory version) In low-speed mode Input/Output characteristics Device structure Package Input/Output withstand voltage Output current
Operating temperature range
NOTE:
1. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 3 of 131
38D2 Group
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
8 8 8
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Port P1 (8) Port P2 (8) Port P3 (8) Timer
On-chip oscillator
Fig. 2 Functional block diagram
System clock generation Timer X (16 bits) PWM (16 bits) IGBT output Timer Y (16 bits) Timer 1 (8 bits) Timer 2 (8 bits) Timer 3 (8 bits) PWM0 (10 bits) Timer 4 (8 bits) PWM1 (10 bits)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8
Port P0 (8)
Internal peripheral function
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page 4 of 131
Serial I/O XIN-XOUT (Main clock) XCIN-XCOUT (Sub-clock)
A/D converter 10-bits x 8-channels
Serial I/O1 (UART or Clock synchronous)
Serial I/O2 (UART or Clock synchronous)
Memory ROM CPU core
ROM correction
LCD drive control circuit
RAM for LCD display (12 bytes)
4 COM x 24 SEG
RAM
Watchdog timer
Port P4 (8)
8 3
Port P5 (8)
Port P6 (3)
8
38D2 Group
PIN DESCRIPTION Table 2 Pin description (1)
Pin VCC, VSS RESET XIN XOUT Name Power source Reset input Clock input Clock output Function * Apply 1.8 to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. * Reset input pin for active "L". * Input and output pins for the main clock generating circuit. * Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins to set the oscillation frequency. When an external clock is used, connect the clock source to XIN, and leave XOUT pin open. * Feedback resistor is built in between XIN pin and XOUT pin. * Input 0 VL1 VL2 VL3 voltage. * Input 0 - VL3 voltage to LCD. * LCD common output pins. * COM2 and COM3 are not used at 1/2 duty ratio. * COM3 is not used at 1/3 duty ratio. * * * * * LCD segment 8-bit I/O port. output pins CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in a bit unit. * Key input interrupt input pins Function except a port function
VL3 COM0- COM3 P00/SEG0/(KW4)- P03/SEG3/(KW7) P04/SEG4- P07/SEG7
LCD power source Common output
I/O port P0
P10/SEG8- P17/SEG15
I/O port P1
* * * *
P20/SEG16- P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2
I/O port P2
* * * *
* LCD power source pins
P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TxD2/(LED2) P33/RxD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/ (LED6) P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/ (LED7) P40/OOUT0/AN0 P41/OOUT1/AN1 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3-P45/AN5 P46/RTP0/AN6 P47/RTP1/AN7 P50/INT0 P51/INT1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P54/RxD1/(KW0) P55/TxD1/(KW1) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P57/SRDY1/(KW3)
I/O port P3
* * * *
* Serial I/O2 function pins 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * External interrupt pin * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit. * Timer X, Timer 2 output pins
* Timer X function pin I/O port P4 * * * * * A/D convertor 8-bit I/O port. input pins CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit. 8-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. CMOS 3-state output structure. I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 4-bit unit * External input pins * Timer 3, Timer 4 output pins * PWM output pins * Serial I/O1 function pins * Key input interrupt input pins * Oscillation external output pins * ADKEY * Real time port function pins
I/O port P5
* * * *
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 5 of 131
38D2 Group
Table 3
Pin description (2)
Pin Name I/O port P6 * * * * Function Function except a port function
P60/CNTR1 P61/XCIN P62/XCOUT
* Timer Y function pins .3-bit I/O port. CMOS compatible input level. * Sub clock generating circuit I/O pins CMOS 3-state output structure. (oscillator connected) I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled in 3-bit unit * Whether oscillation starts by an oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins or an on-chip oscillator is selected. * VPP power source input pin in the QzROM writing mode. * Pin for controlling the operating mode of the chip. Connect to VSS.
OSCSEL (Only QzROM version)
Oscillation start selection pin
CNVSS CNVSS (Only flash memory version) VREF AVSS
Analog reference * Reference voltage input pin for A/D converter. voltage Analog power source * Analog power source input pin for A/D converter. Connect to VSS.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 6 of 131
38D2 Group
PART NUMBERING
Product M38D2 4 G 6 - XXX FP Package type FP: PLQP0064GA-A package HP: PLQP0064KB-A package ROM number Omitted in the shipped in blank version. ROM memory size 1 : 4096 bytes 9 : 36864 bytes 2 : 8192 bytes A : 40960 bytes 3 : 12288 bytes B : 45056 bytes 4 : 16384 bytes C : 49152 bytes 5 : 20480 bytes D : 53248 bytes 6 : 24576 bytes E : 57344 bytes 7 : 28672 bytes F : 61440 bytes 8 : 32768 bytes The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved areas ; they cannot be used. Memory type G : QzROM version F : Flash memory version RAM size 0 : 192 bytes 1 : 256 bytes 2 : 384 bytes 3 : 512 bytes 4 : 640 bytes 5 : 768 bytes 6 : 896 bytes 7 : 1024 bytes 8 : 1536 bytes 9 : 2048 bytes
Fig. 3 Part numbering
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 7 of 131
38D2 Group
GROUP EXPANSION Renesas plans to expand the 38D2 Group as follows. Memory Size * ROM size ................................................... 16 K to 60 K bytes * RAM size .................................................... 640 to 2048 bytes * ROM size ................................................................ 60 K bytes * RAM size ............................................................... 2048 bytes Packages * PLQP0064GA-A ...............0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP * PLQP0064KB-A ...............0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded LQFP
Memory Expansion Plan
ROM size 60K (bytes) 56K 48K 40K 32K 28K 24K 20K 16K 12K 8K 4K
Under development
M38D29GF/FF
M38D29GC
M38D28G8
M38D24G6
M38D24G4
192 256
384
512
640
768
896
1,024
1,536
2,048
RAM size (bytes) Products under development or planning : the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice.
Fig. 4 Memory expansion plan
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 8 of 131
38D2 Group
Currently supported products are listed below Table 4 Support products
Part No. M38D29GF-XXXFP M38D29GF-XXXHP M38D29GFFP M38D29GFHP M38D29GC-XXXFP M38D29GC-XXXHP M38D29GCFP M38D29GCHP M38D28G8-XXXFP M38D28G8-XXXHP M38D28G8FP M38D28G8HP M38D24G6-XXXFP M38D24G6-XXXHP M38D24G6FP M38D24G6HP M38D24G4-XXXFP M38D24G4-XXXHP M38D24G4FP M38D24G4HP M38D29FFFP M38D29FFHP 61440 2048 16384 (16254) 640 24576 (24446) 640 32768 (32638) 1536 49152 (49022) 2048 61440 (61310) 2048 ROM size (bytes) ROM size for User in ( ) RAM size (bytes) Package PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A PLQP0064GA-A PLQP0064KB-A Blank Blank Flash memory version Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank
. As of August 2007
Remarks
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 9 of 131
38D2 Group
Table 5
Differences between QzROM and flash memory versions
QzROM version Flash memory version On-chip oscillator CNVSS = "L" Stop Oscillation on f(OCO)/32 Optional Stop by setting the on-chip oscillator stop bit because it is not stopped. On-chip oscillator is not stopped 2 ms or more -0.3 to VCC + 0.3 2.7 V 2.7 V
Main clock XIN or on-chip oscillator selectable Oscillation circuit at reset and at returning from stop mode by OSCSEL pin Termination of OSCEL/CNVSS pin Main clock oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode On-chip oscillator oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode System clock oscillation at reset and at returning from stop mode Mounting of main clock oscillation circuit On-chip oscillator oscillation in low speed-mode Writing "1" to on-chip oscillator stop bit in on-chip oscillator mode Reset input "L" pulse width Absolute maximum rating: OSCSEL/CNVSS pin Minimum operating power source voltage A/D converter minimum operating power source voltage OSCSEL = "H" Oscillation on Stop f(XIN)/8 Required Stop On-chip oscillator is stopped 2 s or more -0.3 to 8.0 1.8 V 2.0 V OSCSEL = "L" Stop Oscillation on f(OCO)/32 Optional
NOTE:
1. For detailed specifications, confirm the descriptions in the Datasheet.
Notes on Differences between QzROM and Flash Memory Versions (1) The memory map, the writing modes and programming circuits vary because of the differences in their internal memories. (2) The oscillation parameters of XIN-XOUT and XCIN-XCOUT may vary. (3) The QzROM version and the flash memory version MCUs differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, A/D conversion accuracy, noise immunity, and noise radiation may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. (4) When switching from the flash memory version to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those implemented in the flash memory version. (5) The both operations except the electrical characteristics are same at the emulator (emulator MCU board: M38D29TRLFS).
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 10 of 131
38D2 Group
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Central Processing Unit (CPU) The 38D2 Group uses the standard 740 Family instruction set. Refer to the 740 Family Software Manual for details on the instruction set. Machine-resident 740 Family instructions are as follows: The FST and SLW instructions cannot be used. The STP, WIT, MUL, and DIV instructions can be used. The central processing unit (CPU) has six registers. Figure 5 shows the 740 Family CPU register structure. [Accumulator (A)] The accumulator is an 8-bit register. Data operations such as arithmetic data transfer, etc., are executed mainly through the accumulator. [Index Register X (X)] The index register X is an 8-bit register. In the index addressing modes, the value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of register X and specifies the real address. [Index Register Y (Y)] The index register Y is an 8-bit register. In partial instruction, the value of the OPERAND is added to the contents of register Y and specifies the real address. [Stack Pointer (S)] The stack pointer is an 8-bit register used during subroutine calls and interrupts. This register indicates start address of stored area (stack) for storing registers during subroutine calls and interrupts. The low-order 8 bits of the stack address are determined by the contents of the stack pointer. The high-order 8 bits of the stack address are determined by the stack page selection bit. If the stack page selection bit is "0", the high-order 8 bits becomes "0016". If the stack page selection bit is "1", the high-order 8 bits becomes "0116". The operations of pushing register contents onto the stack and popping them from the stack are shown in Figure 6. Table 6 shows the push and pop instructions of accumulator or processor status register. Store registers other than those described in Figure 6 with program when the user needs them during interrupts or subroutine calls. [Program Counter (PC)] The program counter is a 16-bit counter consisting of two 8-bit registers PCH and PCL. It is used to indicate the address of the next instruction to be executed.
b7 A b7 X b7 Y b7 S b15 PCH b7 PCL
b0 Accumulator b0 Index register X b0 Index register Y b0 Stack pointer b0 Program counter
b7 b0 N V T B D I Z C Processor status register (PS) Carry flag Zero flag Interrupt disable flag Decimal mode flag Break flag Index X mode flag Overflow flag Negative flag
Fig. 5 740 Family CPU register structure
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 11 of 131
38D2 Group
On-going Routine
Interrupt request (1) M(S) (PCH) (S) (S) - 1 Execute JSR M(S) (PCL) Push return address on stack M(S) (PCH)
------------
Push return address on stack
(S) (S) - 1 M(S) (PS) (S) (S) - 1 Interrupt Service Routine Execute RTI (S) (S) + 1 (PS) M(S) I Flag is set from "0" to "1" Fetch the jump vector
(S) (S) - 1 M(S) (PCL) (S) (S) - 1 Subroutine
.....
Push contents of processor status register on stack
Execute RTS (S) (S) + 1 (PCL) M(S) (S) (S) + 1 (PCH) M(S)
POP return address from stack
POP contents of processor status register from stack
(S) (S) + 1 (PCL) M(S) (S) (S) + 1 (PCH) M(S)
POP return address from stack
Note1: Condition for acceptance of an interrupt request here Interrupt disable flag is "0" and Interrupt enable bit corresponding to each interrupt source is "1"
Fig. 6 Register push and pop at interrupt generation and subroutine call Table 6 Push and pop instructions of accumulator or processor status register Push instruction to stack PHA PHP Pop instruction from stack PLA PLP
Accumulator Processor status register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 12 of 131
38D2 Group
[Processor Status Register (PS)] The processor status register is an 8-bit register consisting of 5 flags which indicate the status of the processor after an arithmetic operation and 3 flags which decide MCU operation. Branch operations can be performed by testing the Carry (C) flag, Zero (Z) flag, Overflow (V) flag, or the Negative (N) flag. In decimal mode, the Z, V, N flags are not valid. * Bit 0: Carry flag (C) The C flag contains a carry or borrow generated by the arithmetic logic unit (ALU) immediately after an arithmetic operation. It can also be changed by a shift or rotate instruction. * Bit 1: Zero flag (Z) The Z flag is set to "1" if the result of an immediate arithmetic operation or a data transfer is "0", and set to "0" if the result is anything other than "0". * Bit 2: Interrupt disable flag (I) The I flag disables all interrupts except for the interrupt generated by the BRK instruction. Interrupts are disabled when the I flag is "1". * Bit 3: Decimal mode flag (D) The D flag determines whether additions and subtractions are executed in binary or decimal. Binary arithmetic is executed when this flag is "0"; decimal arithmetic is executed when it is "1". Decimal correction is automatic in decimal mode. Only the ADC and SBC instructions can be used for decimal arithmetic. * Bit 4: Break flag (B) The B flag is used to indicate that the current interrupt was generated by the BRK instruction. When the BRK instruction is generated, the B flag is set to "1" automatically. When the other interrupts are generated, the B flag is set to "0", and the processor status register is pushed onto the stack. * Bit 5: Index X mode flag (T) When the T flag is "0", arithmetic operations are performed between accumulator and memory. When the T flag is "1", direct arithmetic operations and direct data transfers are enabled between memory locations. * Bit 6: Overflow flag (V) The V flag is used during the addition or subtraction of one byte of signed data. It is set if the result exceeds +127 to -128. When the BIT instruction is executed, bit 6 of the memory location operated on by the BIT instruction is stored in the overflow flag. * Bit 7: Negative flag (N) The N flag is set to "1" if the result of an arithmetic operation or data transfer is negative. When the BIT instruction is executed, bit 7 of the memory location operated on by the BIT instruction is stored in the negative flag.
Table 7
Set and clear instructions of each bit of processor status register C flag SEC CLC Z flag - - I flag SEI CLI D flag SED CLD B flag - - T flag SET CLT V flag - CLV N flag - -
Set instruction Clear instruction
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 13 of 131
38D2 Group
[CPU Mode Register (CPUM)] 003B16 The CPU mode register contains the stack page selection bit, etc. This register is allocated at address 003B16. After the system is released from reset, the mode depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version. When the OSCSEL pin state is GND level, only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillation. The XIN-XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the OSCSEL pin state is Vcc level, the XIN-XOUT oscillation divided by 8 starts oscillation. The on-chip oscillator stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the frequency/8 mode. In the flash memory version, only the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The XIN-XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The operating mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the main clock or sub-clock is used, after the XIN-XOUT oscillation and the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation are enabled, wait in the on-chip oscillator mode etc. until the oscillation stabilizes, and then switch the operation mode. When the main clock is not used (XIN-XOUT oscillation and an external clock input are not used), connect the XIN pin to VCC through a resistor and leave XOUT open. [CPU Mode Register 2 (CPUM2)] 001116 The CPU mode register 2 contains the control bits for the on-chip oscillator. The CPU mode register 2 is allocated at address 001116.
b7
CPU mode register 2 CPUM2 CM8 (address 001116, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, initial value: 0016) ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, initial value: 0116) ( Flash memory version, initial value: 0016)
b0
On-chip oscillator stop bit (1) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Not used (do not write "1") Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (do not write "1") CPU mode register CPUM CM7 CM6 CM5 CM4 CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 (address 003B16, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, initial value: E016) ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, initial value: 4016) ( Flash memory version, initial value: E016)
b7 b0
Processor mode bits
b1 b0
0 0 : Single-chip mode 0 1: 1 0 : Not available 1 1: Stack page selection bit 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page Internal system clock selection bit 0 : Main clock selected (includes OCO, XIN) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected Port Xc switch bit (2) 0 : I/O port function (Oscillation stop) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (3) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Main clock division ratio selection bit (Valid only when CM3=0) (4)
b7 b6
0 0 1 1
0 : f(XIN)/2 (frequency/2 mode) 1 : f(XIN)/8 (frequency/8 mode) 0 : f(XIN)/4 (frequency/4 mode) 1 : On-chip oscillator
Notes 1: When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 (bit 5 of watchdog timer control register (address 002916)), the on-chip oscillator does not stop even when the on-chip oscillator stop bit is set to "1". Also, when the low-speed mode is set, the on-chip oscillator stops regardless of the value of this bit in the QzROM version. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set this bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. In on-chip oscillator mode, even if this bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. 2: In low-speed mode, the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". 3: In XIN mode, the XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". 4: 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode.
Fig. 7 Structure of CPU mode register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 14 of 131
38D2 Group

Reset
OSCSEL ? L
H Wait by operation until establishment Start with an on-chip oscillator. Initial value of CPUM is E016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0016. As for the details of condition for transition among each mode, refer to the state transition of system clock. The CPU starts its operation in the built-in XIN mode. Initial value of CPUM is 4016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0116.
After releasing reset
After releasing reset
N
Low-speed/XIN mode ? Y Start the oscillation (bits 4 and 5 of CPUM)
Oscillator starts oscillation. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM until oscillation stabilizes. System can operate in on-chip oscillator mode until oscillation stabilize. Select internal system clock. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM at the same time.
Wait by on-chip oscillator operation until establishment of oscillator clock
Select internal system clock (bit 3 of CPUM or bit 7, 6 = "01")
Switch the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 7, 6 = "00" or "10")
Select main clock division ratio. Switch to frequency/2 or frequency/4 mode here, if necessary.
Main routine

Reset Start with an on-chip oscillator. Initial value of CPUM is E016. Initial value of CPUM2 is 0016. As for the details of condition for transition among each mode, refer to the state transition of system clock.
After releasing reset
N
Low-speed/XIN mode ? Y Start the oscillation (bits 4 and 5 of CPUM)
Oscillator starts oscillation. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM until oscillation stabilizes. System can operate in on-chip oscillator mode until oscillation stabilize.
Wait by on-chip oscillator operation until establishment of oscillator clock
Select internal system clock (bit 3 of CPUM or bit 7, 6 = "01")
Select internal system clock. Do not change bit 3, bit 6 and bit 7 of CPUM at the same time.
Switch the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 7, 6 = "00" or "10")
Select main clock division ratio. Switch to frequency/2 or 4 mode here, if necessary.
Main routine
Fig. 8 Switch procedure of CPU mode register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 15 of 131
38D2 Group
MEMORY * Special Function Register (SFR) Area The Special Function Register area in the zero page contains control registers such as I/O ports and timers. * RAM RAM is used for data storage and for stack area of subroutine calls and interrupts. * ROM In the QzROM version, the first 128 Kbytes and the last 2 bytes are reserved for device testing and the rest is the user area. Also, 1 byte of address FFDB16 is reserved. In the flash memory version, programming and erase operations can be performed to reserved ROM areas. * Interrupt Vector Area The interrupt vector area contains reset and interrupt vectors. * Zero Page Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the zero page addressing mode. * Special Page Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the special page addressing mode. * ROM Code Protect Address in QzROM Version (Address FFDB16) Address FFDB16 as reserved ROM area in the QzROM version is ROM code protect address. "0016" or "FE16" is written into this address when selecting the protect bit write by using a serial programmer and selecting protect enabled for writing shipment by Renesas Technology Corp. When "0016" or "FE16" is set to the ROM code protect address, the protect function is enabled, so that reading or writing from/to the corresponding area is disabled by a serial programmer. As for the QzROM product in blank, the ROM code is protected by selecting the protect bit write at ROM writing with a serial programmer. The protect can be performed, dividing twice. The protect area 1 is from the beginning address of ROM to address "EFFF16". As for the QzROM product shipped after writing, "0016" (protect enabled to all area), "FE16" (protect enabled to the protect area 1) or "FF16" (protect disabled) is written into the ROM code protect address when Renesas Technology Corp. performs writing. The writing of "0016", "FE16" or "FF16" can be selected as ROM option setup ("MASK option" written in the mask file converter) when ordering. For the ROM code protect in the flash memory version, refer to the "FLASH MEMORY MODE". * After a reset, the contents of RAM are undefined. Make sure to set the initial value before use. * When Renesas ships QzROM write products, we write ROM option data* specified by the mask file converter MM to the ROM code protect address. Therefore, set FF16 to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than FF16 is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM
000016 Address XXXX16 00FF16 013F16 01BF16 023F16 02BF16 033F16 03BF16 043F16 063F16 083F16
RAM area RAM size (bytes) 192 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 1536 2048 ROM area ROM size (bytes) 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Address YYYY16 F00016 E00016 D00016 C00016 B00016 A00016 900016 800016 700016 600016 500016 400016 300016 200016 100016 Address ZZZZ16 F08016 E08016 D08016 C08016 B08016 A08016 908016 808016 708016 608016 508016 408016 308016 208016 108016
SFR area
Zero page
004016 LCD display RAM area 004C16 RAM 010016 XXXX16 Reserved area 084016 0FD016 0FE016 0FEF16 0FF016 100016 YYYY16 Reserved ROM area (128 bytes) Not used Reserved area SFR area(1) SFR area
(2)
ZZZZ16 EFFF16
Protect area 1
(2)
ROM
FF0016 FFD416 FFDB16 FFDC16 FFFE16 FFFF16 Reserved ROM area(1)
(ID code)
Reserved ROM area
(ROM code protect)
Special page
Interrupt vector area Reserved ROM area
Note 1: This area is available in the flash memory version only. 2: ROM correction vectors are assigned. As for the details, refer to the "ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION". 3: In the flash memory version, programming and erase operations can be performed to reserved ROM areas. Note that their areas are different from those in the QzROM version.
Fig. 9 Memory map diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 16 of 131
38D2 Group
000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716 000816 000916
Port P0 (P0) Port P0 direction register (P0D) Port P1 (P1) Port P1 direction register (P1D) Port P2 (P2) Port P2 direction register (P2D) Port P3 (P3) Port P3 direction register (P3D) Port P4 (P4) Port P4 direction register (P4D)
002016 002116 002216 002316 002416 002516 002616 002716 002816 002916
Timer 1 (T1) Timer 2 (T2) Timer 3 (T3) Timer 4 (T4) PWM01 register (PWM01) Timer 12 mode register (T12M) Timer 34 mode register (T34M) Timer 1234 mode register (T1234M) Timer 1234 frequency division selection register (PRE1234) Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON)
000A16 Port P5 (P5) 000B16 Port P5 direction register (P5D) 000C16 Port P6 (P6) 000D16 Port P6 direction register (P6D) 000E16 000F16 001016 001116 001216 001316 001416 001516 001616 001716 001816 001916 Oscillation output control register (OSCOUT) CPU mode register 2 (CPUM2) RRF register (RRFR) LCD mode register (LM) LCD power control register (VLCON) AD control register (ADCON) AD conversion register (low-order) (ADL) AD conversion register (high-order) (ADH) Transmit/receive buffer register 1 (TB1/RB1) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)
002A16 Timer X (low-order) (TXL) 002B16 Timer X (high-order) (TXH) 002C16 Timer X (extension) (TXEX) 002D16 Timer X mode register (TXM) 002E16 Timer X control register 1 (TXCON1) 002F16 Timer X control register 2 (TXCON2) 003016 003116 003216 003316 003416 003516 003616 003716 003816 003916 Compare register 1 (low-order) (COMP1L) Compare register 1 (high-order) (COMP1H) Compare register 2 (low-order) (COMP2L) Compare register 2 (high-order) (COMP2H) Compare register 3 (low-order) (COMP3L) Compare register 3 (high-order) (COMP3H) Timer Y (low-order) (TYL) Timer Y (high-order) (TYH) Timer Y mode register (TYM) Timer Y control register (TYCON)
001A16 Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) 001B16 UART1 control register (UART1CON) 001C16 Baud rate generator 1 (BRG1) 001D16 Transmit/receive buffer register 2 (TB2/RB2) 001E16 Serial I/O2 status register (SIO2STS) 001F16 0FE016 0FE116 0FE216 0FE316 0FE416 0FE516 0FE616 0FE716 0FE816 0FE916 0FEA16 0FEB16 Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0) Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1) Flash memory control register 2 (FMCR2) Reserved (1) Reserved
(1)
003A16 Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) 003B16 CPU mode register (CPUM) 003C16 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) 003D16 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) 003E16 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) 003F16 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) 0FF016 PULL register (PULL) 0FF116 UART2 control register (UART2CON) 0FF216 Baud rate generator 2 (BRG2) 0FF316 Clock output control register (CKOUT) 0FF416 Segment output disable register 0 (SEG0) 0FF516 Segment output disable register 1 (SEG1) 0FF616 Segment output disable register 2 (SEG2) 0FF716 Key input control register (KIC) 0FF816 ROM correction address 1 high-order register (RCA1H) 0FF916 ROM correction address 1 low-order register (RCA1L) 0FFA16 ROM correction address 2 high-order register (RCA2H) 0FFB16 ROM correction address 2 low-order register (RCA2L) 0FFC16 ROM correction enable register (RCR) 0FFD16 Reserved (1) 0FFE16 Reserved (1) 0FFF16 Reserved (1)
Reserved (1) Reserved (1) Reserved (1) Reserved (1) Reserved (1) Reserved (1) Reserved (1)
0FEC16 Reserved (1) 0FED16 Reserved (1) 0FEE16 0FEF16 Reserved (1) Reserved (1)
Note 1: The blanks are reserved. Do not write data to these areas. 2: No memory access is allowed to the blank areas within the SFRs. 3: Addresses 0FE016 to 0FEF16 are available in the flash memory version only.
Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 17 of 131
38D2 Group
I/O PORTS * Direction Registers The I/O ports P0-P6 have direction registers which determine the input/output direction of each individual pin. Each bit in a direction register corresponds to one pin, each pin can be set to be input port or output port. When "0" is written to the bit of the direction register, the corresponding pin becomes an input pin. As for ports P0-P2, when "1" is written to the bit of the direction register and the segment output disable register, the corresponding pin becomes an output pin. As for ports P3-P6, when "1" is written to the bit of the direction register, the corresponding pin becomes an output pin. If data is read from a pin set to output, the value of the port latch is read, not the value of the pin itself. However, when peripheral output (RTP1, RTP0, TXOUT1, T4OUT, T3OUT, T2OUT/CKOUT, OOUT0, and OOUT1) is selected, the output value is read. Pins set to input are floating. If a pin set to input is written to, only the port output latch is written to and the pin remains floating. * Pull-up Control Each individual bit of ports P0-P2 can be pulled up with a program by setting direction registers and segment output disable registers 0 to 2 (addresses 0FF416 to 0FF616). The pin is pulled up by setting "0" to the direction register and "1" to the segment output disable register. By setting the PULL register (addresses 0FF016), ports P3-P6 can control pull-up with a program. However, the contents of PULL register do not affect ports programmed as the output ports.
b7 b0 PULL register (PULL : address 0FF016) P30-P33 pull-up P34-P37 pull-up P40-P43 pull-up P44-P47 pull-up P50-P53 pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up P54-P57 pull-up P60-P62 pull-up Not used (return "0" when read) b7 b0 Segment output disable register 0 (SEG0 : address 0FF416) P00 pull-up P01 pull-up P02 pull-up P03 pull-up P04 pull-up P05 pull-up P06 pull-up P07 pull-up b7 b0
0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up
Segment output disable register 1 (SEG1 : address 0FF516) P10 pull-up P11 pull-up P12 pull-up P13 pull-up P14 pull-up P15 pull-up P16 pull-up P17 pull-up
Segment output disable register Direction register
"0" Input port No pull-up Segment output
"1" Initial state Input port Pull-up Port output
0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up
"0"
b7
b0
Segment output disable register 2 (SEG2 : address 0FF616) P20 pull-up P21 pull-up P22 pull-up P23 pull-up P24 pull-up P25 pull-up P26 pull-up P27 pull-up
"1"
Fig. 11 Structure of ports P0 to P2
0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up
Notes 1: The PULL register and segment output disable register affect only ports programmed as the input ports. 2: When the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 001416) is "1", settings of P26 and P27 are invalid.
Fig. 12 Structure of PULL register and segment output disable register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 18 of 131
38D2 Group
Table 8
Pin
List of I/O port function
Name Port P0
Input/Output
I/O format
Non-port function Key input (key-on wakeup) interrupt input
Related SFRs Segment output disable register 0
Ref. No.
P00/SEG0/(KW4)- P03/SEG3/(KW7) P04/SEG4- P07/SEG7 P10/SEG8- P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16- P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3)
Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level LCD segment individual bits CMOS 3-state output output
(1)
(2) Port P1 Port P2 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output LCD power input Port P3 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level Serial I/O2 function I/O individual bits CMOS 3-state output PULL register Serial I/O2 control register Serial I/O2 status register UART2 control register PULL register Interrupt edge selection register PULL register Clock output Timer X mode register Timer 12 mode register Clock output control register PULL register Timer X mode register PULL register AD control register Oscillation output control register PULL register AD control register Real time port function output Port P5 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level External interrupt input individual bits CMOS 3-state output Timer 3 output Timer 4 output PWM output Serial I/O1 function I/O Key input (key-on wakeup) interrupt input PULL register AD control register Timer Y mode register PULL register Interrupt edge selection register PULL register Timer 34 mode register PULL register Serial I/O1 control register Serial I/O1 status register UART1 control register PULL register Timer Y mode register PULL register CPU mode register Common Output LCD common output LCD mode register (3) (4) (5) (6) Segment output disable register 1 Segment output disable register 2
P34/INT2/(LED4)
External interrupt input
(7)
P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT /(LED6)
Timer X output 1
Timer 2 output
(8) (9)
P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2 /(LED7)
Timer X function input Timer X output 2 Port P4 Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level individual bits CMOS 3-state output Oscillation external output pins A/D conversion input
(10) (13)
P40/OOUT0/AN0 P41/OOUT1/AN1
P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3-P45/AN5 P46/RTP0/AN6 P47/RTP1/AN7 P50/INT0 P51/INT1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P54/RXD1/(KW0) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P57/SRDY1/(KW3)
(11) (12) (13)
(7)
(9)
(14) (15) (16) (17)
P60/CNTR1 P61/XCIN P62/XCOUT COM0 -COM3
Port P6
Input/Output, CMOS compatible input level Timer Y function input individual bits CMOS 3-state output Sub-clock oscillation circuit
(7) (18) (19) (20)
Notes 1: For details of how to use double/triple function ports as function I/O ports, refer to the applicable sections. 2: Make sure that the input level at each pin is either 0 V or VCC during execution of the STP instruction. When an input level is at an intermediate potential, a current will flow from VCC to VSS through the input-stage gate.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 19 of 131
38D2 Group
(1) Ports P00-P03
VL2/VL3 Segment output disable bit Segment data VL1/VSS Segment output disable bit
(2) Ports P04-P07, P1, P2
VL2/VL3 Segment output disable bit Segment data VL1/VSS Segment output disable bit
Direction register Data bus
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port latch
Key-on wakeup interrupt input
Key input control
LCD power input (VL1,VL2) only for P26, P27
(3) Port P30
Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit SRDY2 output enable bit Direction register
(4) Port P31
Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control
Pull-up control
Data bus
Port latch
Port latch
Serial I/O ready output
Serial I/O clock output Serial I/O clock input
(5) Port P32
P32/TxD2 P-channel output disable bit Serial I/O enable bit Transmit enable bit Direction register Data bus Port latch Pull-up control
(6) Port P33
Serial I/O enable bit Receive enable bit Direction register Pull-up control
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O output
Serial I/O input
Fig. 13 Port block diagram (1)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 20 of 131
38D2 Group
(7) Ports P34, P50, P51, P60
Pull-up control
(8) Port P35
Pull-up control
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
CNTR1 interrupt input INT0-INT2 interrupt input
Pulse output mode Timer X output
(9) Ports P36, P52, P53
Pull-up control
(10) Ports P37
Pull-up control
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Port/Timer output selection Timer output/PWM output Timer output/System clock output
Port/Timer output selection Timer output CNTR0 interrupt input
(11) Ports P42
Pull-up control
(12) Ports P43-P45
Pull-up control
Direction register Data bus
Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
ADKEY enable bit Analog input pin selection bit A-D conversion input
A-D conversion input Analog input pin selection bit
(13) Ports P40, P41, P46, P47
(14) Port P54
Pull-up control Serial I/O enable bit Receive enable bit Direction register Pull-up control
Direction register Data bus Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Oscillation output control bit/ Real time control bit Oscillation output/ Data for real time port
A-D conversion input Analog input pin selection bit
Serial I/O input Key-on wakeup interrupt input Key input control
Fig. 14 Port block diagram (2)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 21 of 131
38D2 Group
(15) Port P55
Pull-up control
(16) Port P56
Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control
P55/TxD1 P-channel output disable bit Serial I/O enable bit Transmit enable bit Direction register Data bus Port latch
Port latch
Serial I/O output
Serial I/O clock output Serial I/O clock input
Key-on wakeup interrupt input
Key input control
Key-on wakeup interrupt input
Key input control
(17) Port P57
Serial I/O mode selection bit Serial I/O enable bit SRDY1 output enable bit Direction register Data bus Pull-up control
(18) Port P61
Xc oscillation enabled + Pull-up control Xc oscillation enabled Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O ready output
Sub-clock generation circuit input
Key-on wakeup interrupt input
Key input control
(19) Port P62
Xc oscillation enabled + Pull-up control
(20) COM0-COM3
VL3
Xc oscillation enabled Direction register Data bus Port latch
VL2 VL1 Gate input signal of each gate depends on the duty ratio and bias values.
Oscillator Port P61 Xc oscillation enabled
VSS
Fig. 15 Port block diagram (3)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 22 of 131
38D2 Group
* Termination of unused pins * Termination of common pins I/O ports: Select an input port or an output port and follow each processing method. In addition, it is recommended that related registers be overwritten periodically to prevent malfunctions, etc. Output ports: Open. Input ports: If the input level become unstable, through current flow to an input circuit, and the power supply current may increase. Especially, when expecting low consumption current (at STP or WIT instruction execution etc.), pull-up or pull-down input ports to prevent through current (built-in resistor can be used). We recommend processing unused pins through a resistor which can secure IOH(avg) or IOL(avg). Because, when an I/O port or a pin which have an output function is selected as an input port, it may operate as an output port by incorrect operation etc.
Table 9
Termination of unused pins
Pin Termination 1 I/O port Termination 2 When selecting SEG output, open. Termination 3 -
P00/SEG0/(KW4)-P07/SEG7 P10/SEG8-P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16-P27/SEG23/VL2 P30/SRDY2/(LED0), P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P31/SCLK2/(LED1), P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P32/TXD2/(LED2), P55/TXD1/(KW1) P33/RXD2/(LED3), P54/RXD1/(KW0) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6) P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7) P40/OOUT0/AN0, P41/OOUT1/AN1 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3-P47/RTP1/AN7 P50/INT0, P51/INT1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0, P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P60/CNTR1 P61/XCIN, P62/XCOUT VL3
When selecting SRDY function, perform termination of output port. When selecting external clock input, perform termination of input port. When selecting TxD function, perform termination of output port. When selecting RxD function, perform termination of input port. When selecting INT function, perform termination of input port. When selecting TXOUT function, perform termination of output port. When selecting T2OUT function or CKOUT function, perform termination of output port. When selecting TXOUT function, perform termination of output port. When selecting AN function, these pins can be opened. (A/D conversion result cannot be guaranteed.)
- When selecting internal clock output, perform termination of output port. - - - - - - When selecting oscillation output, perform termination of output port. When selecting ADKEY function, pull-up this pin through a resistor. - - - - - -
When selecting INT function, perform termination of input port. When selecting PWM, T3OUT, or T4OUT function, perform termination of output port. When selecting CNTR input function, perform termination of input port. Do not select XCIN-XCOUT oscillation function by program. Set the VL3 connect bit to "1" and apply a Vcc level voltage to VL3 pin. Open Connect to Vss Connect to Vcc When only on-chip oscillator is used, connect to VCC through a resistor. When external clock is input or when only on-chip oscillator is used, open. Set the VL3 connect bit to "0" and leave the VL3 pin open. - - - -
COM0-COM3 AVss VREF XIN
- - - -
XOUT
-
-
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 23 of 131
38D2 Group
INTERRUPTS The 38D2 Group interrupts are vector interrupts with a fixed priority scheme, and generated by 16 sources among 18 sources: 6 external, 11 internal, and 1 software. The interrupt sources, vector addresses(1), and interrupt priority are shown in Table 10. Each interrupt except the BRK instruction interrupt has the interrupt request bit and the interrupt enable bit. These bits and the interrupt disable flag (I flag) control the acceptance of interrupt requests. Figure 16 shows an interrupt control diagram. An interrupt requests is accepted when all of the following conditions are satisfied: * Interrupt disable flag ................................ "0" * Interrupt request bit .................................. "1" * Interrupt enable bit ................................... "1" Though the interrupt priority is determined by hardware, priority processing can be performed by software using the above bits and flag.
Table 10 Interrupt vector addresses and priority
Interrupt Source Reset (2) INT0 INT1 INT2 Key input (key-on wakeup) CNTR0 Timer X Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Serial I/O1 receive Serial I/O1 transmit Serial I/O2 receive Serial I/O2 transmit Timer Y CNTR1 A/D conversion BRK instruction 16 17 FFDF16 FFDD16 FFDE16 FFDC16 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FFF516 FFF316 FFF116 FFEF16 FFED16 FFEB16 FFE916 FFE716 FFE516 FFE316 FFE116 FFF416 FFF216 FFF016 FFEE16 FFEC16 FFEA16 FFE816 FFE616 FFE416 FFE216 FFE016 Priority 1 2 3 4 Vector Addresses(1) High FFFD16 FFFB16 FFF916 FFF716 Low FFFC16 FFFA16 FFF816 FFF616 Interrupt Request Generating Conditions At reset At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT0 input At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT1 input At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT2 input At falling of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 input logical level AND At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR0 input At timer X underflow At timer 1 underflow At timer 2 underflow At timer 3 underflow At timer 4 underflow At completion of serial I/O1 transmit shift or transmit buffer is empty Valid when timer 1 interrupt is selected Valid when timer 2 interrupt is selected Valid when timer 3 interrupt is selected Valid when timer 4 interrupt is selected Valid only when serial I/O1 is selected Non-maskable External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (active edge selectable) Valid when INT2 interrupt is selected External interrupt (active edge selectable) Valid when key input interrupt is selected External interrupt (falling valid) External interrupt (active edge selectable) Remarks
At completion of serial I/O1 data receive Valid only when serial I/O1 is selected
At completion of serial I/O2 data receive Valid only when serial I/O2 is selected At completion of serial I/O2 data Valid only when serial I/O2 is selected transmit shift or transmit buffer is empty At timer Y underflow At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR1 input At completion of A/D conversion At BRK instruction execution External interrupt (active edge selectable) Valid when A/D interrupt is selected Non-maskable software interrupt
Notes 1:Vector addresses contain interrupt jump destination addresses. 2:Reset function in the same way as an interrupt with the highest priority.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 24 of 131
38D2 Group
Interrupt request bit Interrupt enable bit
Interrupt disable flag (I) Interrupt acceptance
BRK instruction Reset
Fig. 16 Interrupt control
* Interrupt Disable Flag The interrupt disable flag is assigned to bit 2 of the processor status register. This flag controls the acceptance of all interrupt requests except for the BRK instruction. When this flag is set to "1", the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When it is set to "0", acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. This flag is set to "1" with the SEI instruction and set to "0" with the CLI instruction. When an interrupt request is accepted, the contents of the processor status register are pushed onto the stack while the interrupt disable flag remains set to "0". Subsequently, this flag is automatically set to "1" and multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to "0" with the CLI instruction within the interrupt processing routine. The contents of the processor status register are popped off the stack with the RTI instruction. * Interrupt Request Bits Once an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to "1" and remains "1" until the request is accepted . Wh en the request is accepted, th is bit is automatically set to "0". Each interrupt request bit can be set to "0", but cannot be set to "1", by software. * Interrupt Enable Bits The interrupt enable bits control the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt requests. When an interrupt enable bit is set to "0", the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs in this condition, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to "1", but the interrupt request is not accepted. When an interrupt enable bit is set to "1", acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software. The interrupt enable bit for an unused interrupt should be set to "0".
* Interrupt Source Selection Any of the following combinations can be selected by the interrupt edge selection register (003A16). * INT2 or key input * Timer Y or CNTR1
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 25 of 131
38D2 Group
b7
b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE : address 003A16)
INT0 interrupt edge selection bit INT1 interrupt edge selection bit INT2 interrupt edge selection bit INT2/Key input interrupt switch bit Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit Not used (Do not write to "1".) Not used (return "0" when read) 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 0 : INT2 interrupt 1 : Key input interrupt 0 : Timer Y interrupt 1 : CNTR1 interrupt
b7
b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1 : address 003C16)
INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit INT2 interrupt request bit Key input interrupt request bit CNTR0 interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer 1 interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit
b7
b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2 : address 003D16)
Timer 4 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Serial I/O2 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O2 transmit interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit CNTR1 interrupt request bit AD conversion interrupt request bit Not used (returns "0" when read) 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued
b7
b0
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1 : address 003E16)
INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit CNTR0 interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt enable bit Timer 1 interrupt enable bit Timer 2 interrupt enable bit Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
b7
b0
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2 : address 003F16)
Timer 4 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 receive interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 transmit interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt enable bit CNTR1 interrupt enable bit AD conversion interrupt enable bit Not used (Do not write to "1".) 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 17 Structure of interrupt-related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 26 of 131
38D2 Group
* Interrupt Request Generation, Acceptance, and Handling Interrupts have the following three phases. (i) Interrupt Request Generation An interrupt request is generated by an interrupt source (external interrupt signal input, timer underflow, etc.) and the corresponding request bit is set to "1". (ii) Interrupt Request Acceptance Based on the interrupt acceptance timing in each instruction cycle, the interrupt control circuit determines acceptance conditions (interrupt request bit, interrupt enable bit, and interrupt disable flag) and interrupt priority levels for accepting interrupt requests. When two or more interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the highest priority interrupt is accepted. The value of interrupt request bit for an unaccepted interrupt remains the same and acceptance is determined at the next interrupt acceptance timing point. (iii) Handling of Accepted Interrupt Request The accepted interrupt request is processed. Figure 18 shows the time up to execution in the interrupt routine, and Figure 19 shows the interrupt sequence. Figure 20 shows the timing of interrupt request generation, interrupt request bit, and interrupt request acceptance. * Interrupt Handling Execution When interrupt handling is executed, the following operations are performed automatically. (1) Once the currently executing instruction is completed, an interrupt request is accepted. (2) The contents of the program counters and the processor status register at this point are pushed onto the stack area in order from 1 to 3. 1. High-order bits of program counter (PCH) 2. Low-order bits of program counter (PCL) 3. Processor status register (PS) (3) Concurrently with the push operation, the jump address of the corresponding interrupt (the start address of the interrupt processing routine) is transferred from the interrupt vector to the program counter. (4) The interrupt request bit for the corresponding interrupt is set to "0". Also, the interrupt disable flag is set to "1" and multiple interrupts are disabled. (5) The interrupt routine is executed. (6) When the RTI instruction is executed, the contents of the registers pushed onto the stack area are popped off in the order from 3 to 1. Then, the routine that was before running interrupt processing resumes. As described above, it is necessary to set the stack pointer and the jump address in the vector area corresponding to each interrupt to execute the interrupt processing routine.
Interrupt request generated
Interrupt request acceptance Interrupt sequence
Interrupt routine starts
Main routine
Stack push and Vector fetch
Interrupt handling routine
* 0 to 16 cycles
7 cycles
7 to 23 cycles * When executing DIV instruction
Fig. 18 Time up to execution in interrupt routine
Push onto stack Vector fetch SYNC RD WR Address bus Data bus PC Not used
S,SPS S-1,SPS S-2,SPS
Execute interrupt routine
BL AL
BH AH
AL,AH
PCH
PCL
PS
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle (This is an internal signal that cannot be observed from the external unit.) BL, BH: Vector address of each interrupt AL, AH: Jump destination address of each interrupt SPS : "0016" or "0116" ([SPS] is a page selected by the stack page selection bit of CPU mode register.)
Fig. 19 Interrupt sequence
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 27 of 131
38D2 Group
The interrupt request bit may be set to "1" in the following cases. * When setting the external interrupt active edge Related bits: INT0 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 0 of interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16)) INT1 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 1 of interrupt edge selection register) INT2 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 2 of interrupt edge selection register) CNTR0 activate edge switch bit (bits 6 and 7 of timer X control register 1 (address 002E16)) CNTR1 activate edge switch bit (bits 6 of timer Y mode register (address 003816))
* When switching the interrupt sources of an interrupt vector address where two or more interrupt sources are assigned Related bit: Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit (bit 3 of interrupt edge selection register) If it is not necessary to generate an interrupt synchronized with these settings, take the following sequence. (1) Set the corresponding enable bit to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the interrupt edge selection bit (the active edge switch bit) or the interrupt source bit. (3) Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to "0" after one or more instructions have been executed. (4) Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled).
Instruction cycle Internal clock
Push onto stack Vector fetch
Instruction cycle
SYNC
1
2
T1
IR1 T2
IR2 T3
T1 T2 T3 : Interrupt acceptance timing points IR1 IR2 : Timings points at which the interrupt request bit is set to "1". Note : Period 2 indicates the last cycle during one instruction cycle. (1) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 1 is set to "1" at timing point IR1. (2) The interrupt request bit for an interrupt request generated during period 2 is set to "1" at timing point IR1 or IR2. The timing point at which the bit is set to "1" varies depending on conditions. When two or more interrupt requests are generated during the period 2, each request bit may be set to "1" at timing point IR1 or IR2 separately.
Fig. 20 Timing of interrupt request generation, interrupt request bit, and interrupt acceptance
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 28 of 131
38D2 Group
* Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake-Up) A key input interrupt request is generated by detecting the falling edge from any pin of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 that have been set to input mode. In other words, it is generated when AND of input level goes from "1" to "0". An example of using a key input interrupt is shown in Figure 21, where an interrupt request is generated by pressing one of the keys consisted as an active-low key matrix which inputs to ports P54-P57.
Port PXx "L" level output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 3 = "1" P03 output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 2 = "1" P02 output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 1 = "1" P01 output Segment output disable register 0 Bit 0 = "1" P00 output Port P57 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P57 latch Port P00 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P00 latch Port P01 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P01 latch Port P02 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P02 latch Port P03 direction register = "1" Key input control register = "1" Port P03 latch
Key input interrupt request
Port P0 Input reading circuit
P57 input
P56 input
Port P56 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P56 latch
P55 input
Port P55 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P55 latch Port P54 direction register = "0" Key input control register = "1" Port P54 latch
Port P5 Input reading circuit
P54 input
PULL register Bit 5 = "1" P-channel transistor for pull-up CMOS output buffer
Fig. 21 Connection example when using key input interrupt
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 29 of 131
38D2 Group
A key input interrupt is controlled by the key input control register and port direction registers. When the key input interrupt is enabled, set "1" to the key input control register. A key input of any pin of ports P00-P03, P54-P57 that have been set to input mode is accepted.
b7
b0
Key input control register (KIC : address 0FF716)
P54 key input control bit P55 key input control bit P56 key input control bit P57 key input control bit P00 key input control bit P01 key input control bit P02 key input control bit P03 key input control bit 0 : Key input interrupt disabled 1 : Key input interrupt enabled
Fig. 22 Structure of key input control register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 30 of 131
38D2 Group
TIMERS 8-Bit Timer The 38D2 Group has four built-in 8-bit timers: timer 1, timer 2, timer 3, and timer 4. Each timer has the 8-bit timer latch. All timers are downcounters. When the timer reaches "0016", the contents of the timer latch is reloaded into the timer with the next count pulse. In this mode, the interrupt request bit corresponding to that timer is set to "1". The count can be stopped by setting the stop bit of each timer to "1".
SOURCE (Note)
Frequency divider 8
Clock for timer 1 Clock for timer 3 Clock for timer 2 Clock for timer 4
Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4
Frequency division selection bits (2 bits for each timer)
Data bus
XCIN Clock for timer 1 Timer Y output
Timer 1 count source selection "00" bits "01" "10"
Timer 1 latch (8) Timer 1 (8) Timer 1 interrupt request
Timer 1 count stop bit
The following values can be selected the clock for timer; 1/1,1/2,1/16,1/256
Timer 2 count source selection bits
"00"
Timer 2 latch (8) Timer 2 (8)
Timer 2 write control bit Timer 2 interrupt request
P36/T2OUT/CKOUT
P36 direction register
Timer 2 count stop bit P36 clock output System clock Timer 2 output selection bit control bit "1" S "0" Q T 1/2 "1" Q "0" T2OUT output P36 edge switch bit latch
Clock for timer 2
"01" "10"
Timer 2 output selection bit Timer 3 count source selection bit
Timer 3 latch (8) Timer 3 (8)
Timer 3 write control bit Timer 3 interrupt request
"1"
Clock for timer 3
Timer 3 operating mode selection bit
"0"
Timer 3 count stop bit
P52/PWM0/ T3OUT
"1"
10 bit PWM0 circuit
Timer 3 output selection bit
PWM01 register (2)
"0" "0" S Q P52 direction P52 T "1" register latch Q 1/2 Timer 3 output selection bit T3OUT output edge switch bit
"01" "10"
Timer 4 count source selection bits "11"
Timer 4 latch (8) Timer 4 (8)
Timer 4 write control bit Timer 4 interrupt request
Clock for timer 4
Timer 4 operating mode selection bit
"00"
P53/PWM1/ T4OUT
"1" "0"
10 bit PWM1 circuit
f(XIN)
Timer 4 count stop bit
Timer 4 output selection bit
PWM01 register (2)
"0" S Q P53 P53 direction T "1" latch register 1/2 Q T4OUT output Timer 4 output selection bit edge switch bit
SOURCE: represents the oscillation frequency of XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and sub-clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 23 Timer 1-4 block diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 31 of 131
38D2 Group
* Frequency Divider For Timer Timer 1, timer 2, timer 3 and timer 4 have the frequency divider for the count source. The count source of the frequency divider is switched to XIN, XCIN, or the on-chip oscillator OCO divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode by the CPU mode register. The frequency divider is controlled by each timer division ratio selection bit. The division ratio can be selected from as follows; 1/1, 1/2, 1/16, 1/256 of f(XIN), f(XCIN) or f(OCO)/4. Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. * Timer 1, Timer 2 The count source for timer 1 and timer 2 can be set using the timer 12 mode register. XCIN may be selected as the count source. If XCIN is selected, count operation is possible regardless of whether or not the XIN input oscillator or the on-chip oscillator is operating. In addition, the timer 12 mode register can be used to output from the P36/T2OUT pin a signal to invert the polarity every time timer 2 underflows. At reset, all bits of the timer 12 mode register are set to "0", timer 1 is set to "FF16", and timer 2 is set to "0116". When executing the STP instruction, previously set the wait time at return. * Timer 3, Timer 4 The count sources of timer 3 and timer 4 can be selected by setting the timer 34 mode register. Also, by the timer 34 mode register, each time timer 3 or timer 4 underflows, the signal of which polarity is inverted can be output from P52/T3OUT pin or P53/T4OUT pin. * Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode A PWM rectangular waveform corresponding to the 10-bit accuracy can be output from the P52/PWM0 pin and P53/PWM1 pin by setting the timer 34 mode register and PWM01 register (refer to Figure 24). One output pulse is the short interval. Four output pulses are the long interval. The "n" is the value set in the timer 3 (address 002216) or the timer 4 (address 002316). The "ts" is one period of timer 3 or timer 4 count source. "H" width of the short interval is obtained by n x ts. However, in the long interval, "H" width of output pulse is extended for ts which is set by the PWM01 register (address 002416). (1) Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode * When PWM output is suspended after starting PWM output, depending on the level of the output pulse at that time to resume an output, the delay of the one section of the short interval may be needed. Stop at "H": No output delay Stop at "L": Output is delayed time of 256 x ts * In the PWM mode, the follows are performed every cycle of the long interval (4 x 256 x ts). * Generation of timer 3, timer 4 interrupt requests * Update of timer 3, timer 4 (2) Write to Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the reload latch.
Output waveform of timer 3 PWM0 or timer 4 PWM1
Long interval 4 x 256 x ts Short interval 256 x ts PWM01 register = "002"
n x ts
Short interval 256 x ts
n x ts
Short interval 256 x ts
n x ts
Short interval 256 x ts
n x ts
PWM01 register = "012"
(n+1) x ts
n x ts
n x ts
n x ts
PWM01 register = "102"
(n+1) x ts
n x ts
(n+1) x ts
n x ts
PWM01 register = "112"
(n+1) x ts
(n+1) x ts
(n+1) x ts
n x ts
Interrupt request
Interrupt request
n: Setting value of timer 3 or timer 4 ts: One period of timer 3 count source or timer 4 count source PWM01 register (address 002416) : 2-bit value corresponding to PWM0 (bits 0, 1) or PWM1 (bits 2, 3)
Fig. 24 Waveform of PWM0 and PWM1
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 32 of 131
38D2 Group
b7
b0
b7
b0
Timer 12 mode register (T12M: address 002516) Timer 1 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer 2 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer 1 count source selection bits
b3b2
PWM01 register (PWM01: address 002416) PWM0 set bits
b1b0
0 0 1 1
0 : No extended 1 : Extended once in four periods 0 : Extended twice in four periods 1 : Extended three times in four periods
PWM1 set bits
b3b2
0 0 1 1
0 : Frequency divider for timer 1 1 : f(XCIN) 0 : Underflow of timer Y 1 : Not available
0 0 1 1
0 : No extended 1 : Extended once in four periods 0 : Extended twice in four periods 1 : Extended three times in four periods
Timer 2 count source selection bits
b5b4
Not used (returns "0" when read)
0 0 1 1
0 : Underflow of timer 1 1 : f(XCIN) 0 : Frequency divider for timer 2 1 : Not available
Timer 2 output selection bit (P36) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 2 output T2OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output
b7 b0 b7 b0
Timer 34 mode register (T34M: address 002616) Timer 3 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer 4 count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer 3 count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider for timer 3 1 : Underflow of Timer 2 Timer 4 count source selection bits
b4b3
Timer 1234 frequency division selection register (PRE1234: address 002816)
Timer 1 frequency division selection bits 0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Timer 2 frequency division selection bits
b3b2 b1b0
(1)
0 0 : Frequency divider for timer 4 0 1 : Underflow of Timer 3 1 0 : Underflow of Timer 2 1 1 : f(XIN) Timer 3 operating mode selection bit 0 : Timer mode 1 : PWM mode Timer 4 operating mode selection bit 0 : Timer mode 1 : PWM mode Not used (returns "0" when read)
0 0 1 1
0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE
Timer 3 frequency division selection bits
b5b4
0 0 1 1
0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE
Timer 4 frequency division selection bits
b7b6
0 0 1 1
0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE
b7
b0
Timer 1234 mode register (T1234M: address 002716) T3OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output T4OUT output edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output Timer 3 output selection bit (P52) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 3 output Timer 4 output selection bit (P53) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 4 output
Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode
Timer 2 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer 3 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer 4 write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Not used (returns "0" when read)
Fig. 25 Structure of timer 1 to timer 4 related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 33 of 131
38D2 Group
16-bit Timer Read and write operation on 16-bit timer must be performed for both high and low-order bytes. When reading a 16-bit timer, read the high-order byte first. When writing to a 16-bit timer, write the low-order byte first. The 16-bit timer cannot perform the correct operation when reading during the write operation, or when writing during the read operation.
SOURCE
Frequency divider
2
Timer X frequency division selection bits
Noise filter sampling Trigger for IGBT control bit clock selection bit "1" 1/4 "1" x2 Frequency divider 1/2 "0" "0"
XIN
Data bus
Delay time selection bits
0 s
"00" "10"
INT0 interrupt request Trigger for IGBT control bit Timer X operating mode bits "1" "010" "0" "000" "001" "011" "100" "101"
INT0
Edge selection
Noise filter (4 times same levels judgment)
Delay circuit 8/f(XIN)
4/f(XIN) "01" 16/f(XIN) "11"
Delay circuit 1/2
Clock for timer X "0" XcIN "1" Data for control of event counter window Timer 1 interrupt "00" CNTR0
Both edges detection
Count source selection bit
DQ Latch
Timer X operating mode bits Timer X write control bit "000" "001" Timer X count "010" stop bit "011" "101"
Timer X (low-order) latch (8) Timer X (high-order) latch (8) Extend latch (2) Timer X (low-order)(8) Timer X (high-order)(8)
Extend counter (2)
Timer X interrupt request CNTR0 interrupt request
"01"
"100" Pulse width measurement mode
"10" "11" CNTR0 active edge switch bits
Timer X output Timer X operating "010" mode bits control bit 1 INT1 Edge selection * Timer X output control bit 2 Edge selection * Edge detection
Compare register 1 (low-order)(8) Compare register 1 (high-order)(8) Compare register 2 (low-order)(8) Compare register 2 (high-order)(8) Compare register 3 (low-order)(8) Compare register 3 (high-order)(8)
Equal
INT2
R Q Q "0" P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P35 direction register "1" Timer X output 1 edge switch bit Q Q S T Pulse output mode T
P35 latch
Timer X output 1 selection bit "0" P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7) P37 direction register P37 latch Timer X output 2 selection bit
IGBT output mode PWM mode R Q Q T
"1" Timer X output 2 edge switch bit
SOURCE : represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 26 Timer X block diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 34 of 131
38D2 Group
* Frequency Divider For Timer Each timer X and timer Y have the frequency dividers for the count source. The count source of the frequency divider is switched to XIN, XCIN, or the on-chip oscillator OCO divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode by the CPU mode register. The division ratio of each timer can be controlled by each timer division ratio selection bit. The division ratio can be selected from as follows; 1/1, 1/2, 1/16, 1/256 of f(XIN), f(XCIN) or f(OCO)/4. Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. (4) PWM Mode IGBT dummy output, an external trigger with the INT0 pin and output control with pins INT1 and INT2 are not used. Except for those, this mode operates just as in the IGBT output mode. The period of PWM waveform is specified by the timer X set value. In the case that the timer X output 1 active edge switch bit is "0", the "H" interval is specified by the compare register 1 set value. In the case that the timer X output 2 active edge switch bit is "0", the "H" interval is specified by the compare registers 2 and 3 set values. When using this mode, set the port sharing the pin used as TXOUT1 or TXOUT2 function to output mode. Do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension) when using the PWM mode. (5) Event Counter Mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR0 pin. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR0 pin to input mode. In this mode, the window control can be performed by the timer 1 underflow. When the bit 5 (data for control of event counter window) of the timer X mode register is set to "1", counting is stopped at the next timer 1 underflow. When the bit is set to "0", counting is restarted at the next timer 1 underflow. (6) Pulse Width Measurement Mode In this mode, the count source is the output of frequency divider for timer. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). When the bit 6 of the CNTR0 active edge switch bits is "0", counting is executed during the "H" interval of CNTR0 pin input. When the bit is "1", counting is executed during the "L" interval of CNTR0 pin input. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR0 pin to input mode. Also, set to enable ("0") the data for control of event counter window (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)).
* Timer X The count source for timer X can be set using the timer X mode register. XCIN may be selected as the count source. If XCIN is selected, count operation is possible regardless of whether or not the XIN input oscillator or the on-chip oscillator is operating. The timer X operates as down-count. When the timer contents reach "000016", an underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the timer latch contents are reloaded. After that, the timer continues countdown. When the timer underflows, the interrupt request bit corresponding to the timer X is set to "1". Six operating modes can be selected for timer X by the timer X mode register and timer X control register. (1) Timer Mode The count source can be selected by setting the timer X mode register. In this mode, timer X operates as the 18-bit counter by setting the timer X register (extension). (2) Pulse Output Mode Pulses of which polarity is inverted each time the timer underflows are output from the TXOUT1 pin. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the TXOUT1 pin to output mode. (3) IGBT Output Mode After dummy output from the TXOUT1 pin, count starts with the INT0 pin input as a trigger. In the case that the timer X output 1 active edge switch bit is "0", when the trigger is detected or the timer X underflows, "H" is output from the TXOUT1 pin. And then, when the count value corresponds with the compare register 1 value, the TXOUT1 output becomes "L". After noise is cleared by noise filters, judging continuous 4-time same levels with sampling clocks to be signals, the INT0 signal can use 4 types of delay time by a delay circuit. When using this mode, set the port sharing the INT0 pin to input mode and set the port sharing the pin used as TXOUT1 or TXOUT2 function to output mode. When the timer X output control bit 1 or 2 of the timer X control register is set to "1", the timer X count stop bit is fixed to "1" forcibly by the interrupt signal of INT1 or INT2. And then, the TXOUT1 output and TXOUT2 output can be set to "L" forcibly at the same time that the timer X stops counting. Do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension) when using the IGBT output mode.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 35 of 131
38D2 Group
ts Timer X count source Timer X PWM mode IGBT output mode
External trigger (INT0 source) is generated.
Level is "H" only IGBT output mode.
INT1 or INT2 source is generated.
TXOUT1 output (TXCON1 bit 5 = "0")
m x ts
Level is forcibly "L" only IGBT output mode.
TXOUT2 output (TXCON2 bit 1 = "0") p x ts (n+1) x ts
q x ts
n : Timer X setting value m: Compare register 1 setting value p : Compare register 2 setting value q : Compare register 3 setting value ts: One period of timer X count source
The following PWM waveform is output; Duty of TXOUT1 output :{(n+1)-m}/(n+1), Duty of TXOUT2 output :(p-q)/(n+1), Period :(n+1) x ts
Fig. 27 Waveform of PWM/IGBT
(1) Write Order to Timer X * In the timer mode, pulse output mode, event counter mode and pulse width measurement mode, write to the following registers in the order as shown below; the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (low-order), the timer X register (high-order). Do not write to only one of them. When the above mode is set and timer X operates as the 16-bit counter, if the timer X register (extension) is never set after reset is released, setting the timer X register (extension) is not required. In this case, write the timer X register (low-order) first and the timer X register (high-order). However, once writing to the timer X register (extension) is executed, note that the value is retained to the reload latch. * Write to the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not read the timer X register while write operation is performed. If the write operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. * In the IGBT output and PWM modes, do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension). Also, when "1" is already written to the timer X register, be sure to write "0" to the register before using. Write to the following registers in the order as shown below; the compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order), the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (low-order), the timer X register (high-order). It is possible to use whichever order to write to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order). However, write both the compare registers 1, 2, 3 and the timer X register at the same time. For the compare registers, set a value less than the setting value in the timer X register. Also, do not set "0016". (2) Read Order to Timer X * In all modes, read the following registers in the order as shown below; the timer X register (extension), the timer X register (high-order), the timer X register (low-order). When reading the timer X register (extension) is not required, read the timer X register (high-order) first and the timer X register (low-order). Read order to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 is not specified. * Read from the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not write to the timer X register while read operation is performed. If the read operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. (3) Write to Timer X * Which write control can be selected by the timer X write control bit (b3) of the timer X mode register (address 2D16), writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only to the latch. When writing a value to the timer X address to write to the latch only, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After reset release, when writing a value to the timer X address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written at the same time. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the highorder reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the high-order reload latch. * Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 36 of 131
38D2 Group
(4) Set of Timer X Mode Register Set the write control bit of the timer X mode register to "1" (write to the latch only) when setting the IGBT output and PWM modes. Output waveform simultaneously reflects the contents of both registers at the next underflow after writing to the timer X register (high-order). (5) Output Control Function of Timer X * When using the output control function (INT1 and INT2) in the IGBT output mode, set the levels of INT1 and INT2 to "H" in the falling edge active or to "L" in the rising edge active before switching to the IGBT output mode. (6) Switch of CNTR0 Active Edge * When the CNTR0 active edge switch bits are set, at the same time, the interrupt active edge is also affected. When the pulse width is measured, set the bit 7 of the CNTR0 active edge switch bits to "0". (7) When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used When timer X pulse width measurement mode is used, enable the event counter wind control data (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)) by setting to "0". If the event counter window control data (bit 5 of timer X mode r egister (add ress 002 D16)) is set to "1" (disabled) to enable/disable the CNTR0 input, the input is not accepted after the timer 1 underflow.
b7
b0
b7
Timer X mode register (TXM: address 002D16) Timer X operating mode bits
b2b1b0
b0
Timer X control register 1 (TXCON1: address 002E16) Noise filter sampling clock selection bit 0 : f(XIN)/2 1 : f(XIN)/4 External trigger delay time selection bits
b2b1
0 0 0 : Timer mode 0 0 1 : Pulse output mode 0 1 0 : IGBT output mode 0 1 1 : PWM mode 1 0 0 : Event counter mode 1 0 1 : Pulse width measurement mode 1 1 0 : Not available 1 1 1 : Not available Timer X write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer X count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider output 1 : f(XCIN) Data for control of event counter window 0 : Event count enabled 1 : Event count disabled Timer X count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop Timer X output 1 selection bit (P35) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer X output 1
0 0 : Not delayed 0 1 : (4/f(XIN)) s 1 0 : (8/f(XIN)) s 1 1 : (16/f(XIN)) s Timer X output control bit 1 (P51) 0 : Not used INT1 interrupt signal 1 : INT1 interrupt signal used Timer X output control bit 2 (P34) 0 : Not used INT2 interrupt signal 1 : INT2 interrupt signal used Timer X output 1 active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output CNTR0 active edge switch bits
b7b6
b7
b0
Timer X control register 2 (TXCON2: address 002F16) Timer X output 2 control bit (P37) 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer X output 2 Timer X output 2 active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "L" output 1 : Start at "H" output Timer X dividing frequency selection bits
b3b2
0 0 : Count at rising edge in event counter mode Falling edge active for CNTR0 interrupt Measure "H" pulse width in pulse width measurement mode 0 1 : Count at falling edge in event counter mode Rising edge active for CNTR0 interrupt Measure "L" pulse width in pulse width measurement mode 1 0 : Count at both edges in event counter mode 1 1 : Both edges active for CNTR0 interrupt
0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE (1) 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Trigger for IGBT input control bit 0 : Noise filter sampling clock x 1 External trigger delay time x 1 1 : Noise filter sampling clock x 2 External trigger delay time x 1/2 Not used (returns "0" when read)
Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode
Fig. 28 Structure of timer X related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 37 of 131
38D2 Group
Data bus
SOURCE
2
Frequency divider
"0"
Timer Y dividing frequency selection bit
Timer Y operating mode bits "00", "01", "10" Pulse width HL continuous measurement mode Period measurement mode
CNTR1 interrupt request
"11"
XcIN
"1" Count source selection bit
Rising edge detection Falling edge detection
Timer Y write control bit Timer Y count stop bit "00", "01", "11"
CNTR1 active edge switch bit "0"
Timer Y (low-order) latch (8) Timer Y (high-order) latch (8) Timer Y (low-order)(8) Timer Y (high-order)(8)
CNTR1
"1" "10"
Timer Y operating mode bits
Timer Y interrupt request
Real time port control bits "11"
QD Latch
P47/RTP1/AN7
P47 direction register "00" P47 latch
P47 data for real time port
Real time port control bits "00" Timer Y mode register write signal
"11" Real time port control bits
Real time port control bits "11"
QD Latch
P46/RTP0/AN6
P46 direction register "00" P46 latch
P46 data for real time port
"00"
Timer Y mode register write signal
"11"
Note: In frequency/2, frequency/4, or frequency/8 mode, SOURCE is the XIN input. In on-chip oscillator mode, SOURCE is the on-chip oscillator frequency divided by 4. In low-speed mode, SOURCE is the sub-clock frequency.
Fig. 29 Block diagram of timer Y
* Timer Y Timer Y is a 16-bit timer. The timer Y count source can be selected by setting the timer Y mode register. XCIN can be selected as the count source. When XCIN is selected as the count source, counting can be performed regardless of XIN oscillation or on-chip oscillator oscillation. Four operating modes can be selected for timer Y by the timer Y mode register. Also, the real time port can be controlled. (1) Timer Mode The timer Y count source can be selected by setting the timer Y mode register. (2) Period Measurement Mode The interrupt request is generated at rising or falling edge of CNTR1 pin input signal. Simultaneously, the value in timer Y latch is reloaded in timer Y and timer Y continues counting. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. The timer value just before the reloading at rising or falling of CNTR1 pin input is retained until the timer Y is read once after the reload. The rising or falling timing of CNTR1 pin input is found by CNTR1 interrupt. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode.
(3) Event Counter Mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR1 pin. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the timer mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode. (4) Pulse Width HL Continuously Measurement Mode The interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal. Except for that, this mode operates just as in the period measurement mode. When using this mode, set the port sharing the CNTR1 pin to input mode. (5) Real Time Port Control When the real time port function is valid, data for the real time port is output from ports P46 and P47 each time the timer Y underflows. (However, if the real time port control bits are changed from "002" to "112" after both data for real time ports are set, data are output independent of the timer Y operation.) When either or both data for real time ports are changed while the real time port function is valid, the changed data is output at the next underflow of timer Y. When switching the setting of the real time port control bits between valid and invalid, write to the timer Y mode register in byte units with the LDM or STA instruction so that both bits are switched at the same time. Also, before using this function, set the P46 and P47 port direction registers to output.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 38 of 131
38D2 Group
* CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection CNTR1 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. However, in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal regardless of the setting of CNTR1 active edge switch bit. * Timer Y Read/Write Control * When reading from/writing to timer Y, read from/write to both the high-order and low-order bytes of timer Y. When the value is read, read the high-order bytes first and the low-order bytes next. When the value is written, write the low-order bytes first and the highorder bytes next. Write to or read from the timer X register in 16-bit units. If reading from the timer Y register during write operation or writing to it during read operation is performed, normal operation will not be performed. * Which write control can be selected by the timer Y write control bit (b0) of the timer Y control register (address 003916), writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only to the latch. When writing a value to the timer Y address to write to the latch only, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After reset release, when writing a value to the timer Y address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are set to write at the same time. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the highorder reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. In this time, counting is stopped during writing to the high-order reload latch. * This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register.
b7
b0
b7
b0
Timer Y mode register (TYM: address 003816) Real time port control bits (P46, P47 ) b1 b0 0 0 : Real time port function invalid 0 1 : Do not set 1 0 : Do not set 1 1 : Real time port function valid P46 data for real time port P47 data for real time port Timer Y operating mode bits b5 b4 0 0 : Timer mode 0 1 : Period measurement mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuous measurement mode CNTR1 active edge switch bit 0 : Count at rising edge in event counter mode Measure falling period in period measurement mode Falling edge active for CNTR1 interrupt 1 : Count at falling edge in event counter mode Measure rising period in period measurement mode Rising edge active for CNTR1 interrupt Timer Y count stop bit 0 : Count operation 1 : Count stop
Timer Y control register (TYCON: address 003916) Timer Y write control bit 0 : Write data to both timer latch and timer 1 : Write data to timer latch only Timer Y count source selection bit 0 : Frequency divider output 1 : f(XCIN) Timer Y frequency division selection bits b3 b2 0 0 : 1/16 x SOURCE 0 1 : 1/1 x SOURCE 1 0 : 1/2 x SOURCE 1 1 : 1/256 x SOURCE Not used (returns "0" when read)
SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 30 Structure of timer Y related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 39 of 131
38D2 Group
SERIAL INTERFACE * SERIAL I/O The 38D2 Group has two 8-bit serial I/O (serial I/O1 and serial I/O2). Serial I/O can be used as either clock synchronous or asynchronous (UART) serial I/O. A dedicated timer is also provided for baud rate generation.
Data bus Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Receive buffer register P54/RXD1 [P33/RXD2] Receive shift register Shift clock P56/SCLK1 [P31/SCLK2] Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator 1/4 Address 001C16 [Address 0FF216] Clock control circuit Shift clock P55/TXD1 [P32/TXD2] Transmit shift register Transmit buffer register Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Data bus [ ] : For Serial I/O2 Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) Transmit interrupt source selection bit Transmit interrupt request (TI) Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Address 001916 [Address 001E16] Clock control circuit Serial I/O control register Address 001A16 [Address 001F16] Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Receive interrupt request (RI)
(1) Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode Clock synchronous serial I/O mode can be selected by setting the serial I/O mode selection bit of the serial I/O control register to "1". For clock synchronous serial I/O, the transmitter and the receiver must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is started by a write signal to the TB/RB.
SOURCE
BRG count source selection bit 1/4
P57/SRDY1 [P30/SRDY2]
F/F
Falling-edge detector
Serial I/O status register
SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 31 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O
Transfer shift clock (1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal clock, or an external clock) Serial output TxD Serial input RxD Receive enable signal SRDY Write pulse to receive/transmit buffer register TBE = 0 TBE = 1 TSC = 0 RBF = 1 TSC = 1 Overrun error (OE) detection D0 D0 D1 D1 D2 D2 D3 D3 D4 D4 D5 D5 D6 D6 D7 D7
Notes 1: As the transmit interrupt (TI) source, which can be selected, either when the transmit buffer has emptied (TBE = 1) or after the transmit shift operation has ended (TSC = 1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O control register. 2: If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is output continuously from the TxD pin. 3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes "1" .
Fig. 32 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O function
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 40 of 131
38D2 Group
(2) Asynchronous Serial I/O (UART) Mode Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode (UART) can be selected by setting the serial I/O mode selection bit of the serial I/O control register to "0". Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical. The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer, but the two buffers have the same address in memory. Since the shift
Data bus Serial I/O control register Address 001A16 [Address 001F16] OE Receive buffer register Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Receive interrupt request (RI) Character length selection bit 7 bits ST detector Receive shift register 8 bits PE FE SP detector Clock control circuit P56/SCLK1 [P31/SCLK2] SOURCE Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit 1/16 UART control register Address 001B16 [Address 0FE116] Address 001816 [Address 001D16]
register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is read from the receive buffer register. The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character while the next character is being received.
P54/RXD1 [P33/RXD2]
BRG count source selection bit 1/4
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator Address 001C16 [Address 0FE216] ST/SP/PA generator 1/16 Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) Transmit interrupt source selection bit Transmit interrupt request (TI) Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Address 001916 [Address 001E16]
P55/TXD1 [P32/TXD2] Character length selection bit
Transmit shift register Transmit buffer register Address 001816 [Address 001D16] Data bus
Serial I/O status register
[ ] : For Serial I/O2 SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 33 Block diagram of UART serial I/O
Transmit or receive clock
Transmit buffer register write signal TBE=0 TSC=0 TBE=1 Serial output TxD ST D0 D1 1 start bit 7 or 8 data bit 1 or 0 parity bit 1 or 2 stop bit (s) Receive buffer register read signal RBF=1 Serial input RxD ST D0 D1 SP ST D0 D1 SP RBF=0 RBF=1 SP ST D0 D1 SP TBE=0 TBE=1 TSC=1
Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode
Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes "1" (at 1st stop bit, during reception). 2: As the transmit interrupt (TI), when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes "1", can be selected to occur depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O control register. 3: The receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes "1". 4: After data is written to the transmit buffer when TSC flag = "1", 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle is necessary until changing to TSC flag = "0".
Fig. 34 Operation of UART serial I/O function
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 41 of 131
38D2 Group
[Transmit Buffer Register/Receive Buffer Register (TB1, RB1/TB2, RB2)] The transmit buffer register and the receive buffer register are located at the same address. The transmit buffer is write-only and the receive buffer is read-only. If a character bit length is 7 bits, the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer is "0". [Serial I/O Status Register (SIO1STS, SIO2STS)] The read-only serial I/O status register consists of seven flags (bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O function and various errors. Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode. The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is set to "0" when the receive buffer register is read. If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the serial I/O status register sets all the error flags OE, PE, FE, and SE (bit 3 to bit 6, respectively) to "0". Writing "0" to the serial I/O enable bit SIOE (bit 7 of the serial I/O control register) also sets all the status flags to "0", including the error flags. All bits of the serial I/O status register are set to "0" at reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O control register has been set to "1", the transmit shift completion flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become "1". [Serial I/O Control Register (SIO1CON, SIO2CON)] The serial I/O control register consists of eight control bits for the serial I/O function. [UART Control Register (UART1CON, UART2CON)] The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to 3) which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and set the data format of the data transfer and one bit (bit 4) which is always valid and sets the output structure of the P55/TXD1 [P32/TxD2] pin. [Baud Rate Generator (BRG1, BRG2)] The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial transfer. The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate generator. When setting transmit enable bit of serial I/O to "1", the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit is automatically set to "1". When not requiring the interrupt occurrence synchronous with the transmission enabled, take the following sequence. (1) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the transmit enable bit to "1". (3) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit to "0" after 1 or more instructions have been executed. (4) Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled).
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 42 of 131
38D2 Group
b7
b0
Serial I/O status register (SIO1STS : address 001916) [SIO2STS : address 001E16] Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) 0: Buffer full 1: Buffer empty Receive buffer full flag (RBF) 0: Buffer empty 1: Buffer full Transmit shift completion flag (TSC) 0: Transmit shift in progress 1: Transmit shift completed Overrun error flag (OE) 0: No error 1: Overrun error Parity error flag (PE) 0: No error 1: Parity error Framing error flag (FE) 0: No error 1: Framing error Summing error flag (SE) 0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=0 1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE)=1 Not used (returns "1" when read)
b7
b0
Serial I/O control register (SIO1CON : address 001A16) [SIO2CON : address 001F16] BRG count source selection bit (CSS) 0: SOURCE 1: SOURCE/4 Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit (SCS) 0: BRG output divided by 4 when clock synchronous serial I/O is selected. BRG output divided by 16 when UART is selected. 1: External clock input when clock synchronous serial I/O is selected. External clock input divided by 16 when UART is selected. SRDY output enable bit (SRDY) 0: P57 [P30] pin operates as ordinary I/O pin 1: P57 [P30] pin operates as SRDY output pin Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) 0: Interrupt when transmit buffer has emptied 1: Interrupt when transmit shift operation is completed Transmit enable bit (TE) 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled Receive enable bit (RE) 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled Serial I/O mode selection bit (SIOM) 0: Clock asynchronous (UART) serial I/O 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O Serial I/O enable bit (SIOE) 0: Serial I/O disabled (pins P54 [P30] to P57 [P33] operate as ordinary I/O pins) 1: Serial I/O enabled (pins P54 [P30] to P57 [P33] operate as serial I/O pins)
b7
b0
UART control register (UART1CON : address 001B16) [UART2CON : address 0FF116] Character length selection bit (CHAS) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits Parity enable bit (PARE) 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled Parity selection bit (PARS) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity Stop bit length selection bit (STPS) 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits P55/TXD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (POFF) 0: CMOS output (in output mode) 1: N-channel open drain output (in output mode) Not used (return "1" when read)
( ) : For Serial I/O1 [ ] : For Serial I/O2 SOURCE: represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 35 Structure of serial I/O related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 43 of 131
38D2 Group
A/D CONVERTER The 38D2 Group has a 10-bit A/D converter. The A/D converter performs successive approximation conversion. The 38D2 Group has the ADKEY function which perform A/D conversion of the "L" level analog input from the ADKEY pin automatically. [AD Conversion Register (ADL, ADH)] One of these registers is a high-order register, and the other is a low-order register. The high-order 8 bits of a conversion result is stored in the AD conversion register (high-order) (address 001716), and the low-order 2 bits of the same result are stored in bit 7 and bit 6 of the AD conversion register (low-order) (address 001616). During A/D conversion, do not read these registers. Also, the connection between the resistor ladder and reference voltage input pin (VREF) can be controlled by the VREF input switch bit (bit 0 of address 001616). When "1" is written to this bit, the resistor ladder is always connected to VREF. When "0" is written to this bit, the resistor ladder is disconnected from VREF except during the A/D conversion. [AD Control Register (ADCON)] This register controls A/D converter. Bits 2 to 0 are analog input pin selection bits. Bit 3 is an AD conversion completion bit and "0" during A/D conversion. This bit is set to "1" upon completion of A/D conversion. A/D conversion is started by setting "0" in this bit. Bit 5 is the ADKEY enable bit. The ADKEY function is enabled by setting "1" to this bit. When this function is valid, the analog input pin selection bits are ignored. Also, when bit 5 is "1", do not set "0" to bit 3 by program. [Comparison Voltage Generator] The comparison voltage generator divides the voltage between AVSS and VREF, and outputs the divided voltages. [Channel Selector] The channel selector selects one of the input ports P47/AN7- P40/AN0 and inputs it to the comparator. [Comparator and Control Circuit] The comparator and control circuit compare an analog input voltage with the comparison voltage and store the result in the AD conversion register. When an A/D conversion is completed, the control circuit sets the AD conversion completion bit and the AD conversion interrupt request bit to "1". The comparator is constructed linked to a capacitor. The conversion accuracy may be low because the change is lost if the conversion speed is not enough. Accordingly, set f(XIN) to at least 500 kHz during A/D conversion in the XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP and WIT instructions during the A/D conversion. In the low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode, there is no limit on the oscillation frequency because the on-chip oscillator is used as the A/D conversion clock. In the low-speed mode, onchip oscillator starts oscillation automatically at the A/D conversion is executed and stops oscillation automatically at the A/D conversion is finished even though it is not oscillating.
Data bus b7 b0
AD control register ADKEY control circuit SOURCE
1/ 2 1/ 8
P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2/ADKEY P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6 P47/AN7
A/D control circuit
A/D interrupt request
Channel selector
Comparator
AD conversion register (H) AD conversion register (L) (Address 001716) Resistor ladder (Address 001616)
AVSS
VREF
Note: In frequency/2, frequency/4, or frequency/8 mode, SOURCE is the XIN input. In low-speed mode, or on-chip oscillator mode, SOURCE is the on-chip oscillator frequency divided by 4.
Fig. 36 Block diagram of A/D converter
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 44 of 131
38D2 Group
ADKEY function The ADKEY function is used to judge the analog input voltage input from the ADKEY pin. When the A/D converter starts operating after VIL (0.7 x Vcc-0.5) or less is input, the event of analog voltage input can be judged with the A/D conversion interrupt. This function can be used with the STP and WIT state. As for the ADKEY function in 38D2 Group, the A/D conversion of analog input voltage immediately after starting ADKEY function is not performed. Therefore, the A/D conversion result immediately after an ADKEY function is undefined. Accordingly, when the A/D conversion result of the analog input voltage input from the ADKEY pin is required, start the A/D conversion by program after the analog input pin corresponding to ADKEY is selected. * ADKEY Selection When the ADKEY pin is used, set the ADKEY selection bit to "1". The ADKEY selection bit is "0", just after the A/D conversion is started. * ADKEY Enable The ADKEY function is enabled by writing "1" to the ADKEY enable bit. Surely, in order to enable ADKEY function, set "1" to the ADKEY enable bit, after setting the ADKEY selection bit to "1". When the ADKEY enable bit of the AD control register is "1", the analog input pin selection bits become invalid. Please do not write "0" in the AD conversion completion bit by the program during ADKEY enabled state. [ADKEY Control Circuit] In order to obtain a more exact conversion result, by the A/D conversion with ADKEY, execute the following; * set the input to the ADKEY pin into a steep falling waveform, * stabilize the input voltage within 8 clock cycles (1 s at f(XIN) = 8 MHz) after the input voltage is under VIL The threshold voltage with an actual ADKEY pin is the voltage between VIH-VIL. In order not to make ADKEY operation perform superfluously in a noise etc., in the state of the waiting for an input, set the voltage of an ADKEY pin to VIH (0.9VCC) or more. When the following operations are performed, the A/D conversion operation cannot be guaranteed. * When the CPU mode register is operated during A/D conversion operation, * When the AD conversion control register is operated during A/D conversion operation, * When the STP or WIT instruction is executed during A/D conversion operation.
b7
b0
AD control register (ADCON: address 001516) Analog input pin selection bits
b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
AD conversion completion bit 0 : Conversion in progress 1 : Conversion completed AD conversion clock selection bit 0 : SOURCE/2 (1) 1 : SOURCE/8 ADKEY enable bit (2) 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 10-bit or 8-bit conversion switch bit 0 : 10-bit AD 1 : 8-bit AD ADKEY selection bit 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid At 10bitAD (Read address 001716 before 001616) AD conversion register high-order (Address 001716) AD conversion register low-order (Address 001616)
b7 b0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 (high-order) b7 b1 b0 b0 *
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 : P40/AN0 1 : P41/AN1 0 : P42/AN2 1 : P43/AN3 0 : P44/AN4 1 : P45/AN5 0 : P46/AN6 1 : P47/AN7
(low-order)
* VREF input switch bit 0: ON only during A/D conversion 1: ON Note : The bit 5 to bit 1 of address 001616 become "0" at reading. Also, bit 0 is undefined at reading. At 8bitAD (Read only address 001716)
b7 b0
(Address 001716)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Notes 1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the low-speed and the on-chip oscillator mode 2: When the ADKEY enable bit is "1", the analog input pin selection bits are invalid. Do not execute the A/D conversion by program while the ADKEY is enabled. Bit 0 to bit 2 of ADCON are not changed even when ADKEY is enabled.
Fig. 37 Structure of AD control register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 45 of 131
38D2 Group
LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT The 38D2 Group has the built-in Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) drive control circuit consisting of the following. * LCD display RAM * Segment output disable register * LCD mode register * Selector * Timing controller * Common driver * Segment driver * Bias control circuit A maximum of 24 segment output pins and 4 common output pins can be used. Up to 96 pixels can be controlled for an LCD display. When the LCD enable bit is set to "1" after data is set in the LCD mode register, the segment output disable register, and the LCD display
b7 b0 LCD mode register (LM : address 001316) Duty ratio selection bits b1b0 0 0 : Not used 0 1 : 2 (use COM0, COM1) 1 0 : 3 (use COM0-COM2) 1 1 : 4 (use COM0-COM3) Bias control bit 0 : 1/3 bias 1 : 1/2 bias LCD enable bit 0 : LCD OFF 1 : LCD ON LCD drive timing selection bit 0 : Type A 1 : Type B LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits b6b5 0 0 : Clock input 0 1 : 2 division of clock input 1 0 : 4 division of clock input 1 1 : 8 division of clock input LCDCK count source selection bit (Note 3) 0 : f(XCIN)/32 1 : SOURCE/8192
RAM, the LCD drive control circuit starts reading the display data automatically, performs the bias control and the duty ratio control, and displays the data on the LCD panel. . Table 11 Maximum number of display pixels at each duty ratio
Duty ratio 2 3 4
Maximum number of display pixels 48 dots or 8 segment LCD 6 digits 72 dots or 8 segment LCD 9 digits 96 dots or 8 segment LCD 12 digits
b7
b0 Segment output disable register 0 (1) (SEG0 : address 0FF416) Segment output disable bit 0 0 : Segment output SEG0 1 : Output port P00 Segment output disable bit 1 0 : Segment output SEG1 1 : Output port P01 Segment output disable bit 2 0 : Segment output SEG2 1 : Output port P02 Segment output disable bit 3 0 : Segment output SEG3 1 : Output port P03 Segment output disable bit 4 0 : Segment output SEG4 1 : Output port P04 Segment output disable bit 5 0 : Segment output SEG5 1 : Output port P05 Segment output disable bit 6 0 : Segment output SEG6 1 : Output port P06 Segment output disable bit 7 0 : Segment output SEG7 1 : Output port P07
b7
b0
Segment output disable register 1 (1) (SEG1 : address 0FF516) Segment output disable bit 8 0 : Segment output SEG8 1 : Output port P10 Segment output disable bit 9 0 : Segment output SEG9 1 : Output port P11 Segment output disable bit 10 0 : Segment output SEG10 1 : Output port P12 Segment output disable bit 11 0 : Segment output SEG11 1 : Output port P13 Segment output disable bit 12 0 : Segment output SEG12 1 : Output port P14 Segment output disable bit 13 0 : Segment output SEG13 1 : Output port P15 Segment output disable bit 14 0 : Segment output SEG14 1 : Output port P16 Segment output disable bit 15 0 : Segment output SEG15 1 : Output port P17
b7
b0
Segment output disable register 2 (1) (SEG2 : address 0FE616) Segment output disable bit 16 0 : Segment output SEG16 1 : Output port P20 Segment output disable bit 17 0 : Segment output SEG17 1 : Output port P21 Segment output disable bit 18 0 : Segment output SEG18 1 : Output port P22 Segment output disable bit 19 0 : Segment output SEG19 1 : Output port P23 Segment output disable bit 20 0 : Segment output SEG20 1 : Output port P24 Segment output disable bit 21 0 : Segment output SEG21 1 : Output port P25 Segment output disable bit 22 0 : Segment output SEG22 1 : Output port P26 Segment output disable bit 23 0 : Segment output SEG23 1 : Output port P27
Notes 1: Only pins set to output ports by the direction register can be controlled to switch to output ports or segment outputs by the segment output disable register. 2: When the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 003816) is "1", settings of the segment output disable bit 22 and segment output disable bit 23 are invalid. 3: LCDCK is a clock for an LCD timing controller. SOURCE represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and Sub clock in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 38 Structure of LCD related registers
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 46 of 131
38D2 Group
Data bus
Address 004016
Address 004116
Address 004C16
LCD enable bit LCD display RAM LCDCK count source selection bit "0" LCD divider "1" f(XCIN)/32 SOURCE/8192 Duty ratio selection bits LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits 2 Bias control bit 2
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Selector Selector LCD power control register 5 Timing controller LCDCK Level shift Bias control Level shift Level shift Level Level Level shift shift shift Segment Segment driver driver Common Common Common Common driver driver driver driver P20/SEG16 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 P27/ VSS P26/ VL3 SEG22/ SEG23/ VL2 VL1 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3
Fig. 39 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver
Page 47 of 131
Selector Selector Selector Selector
Level shift
Level shift
Level shift
Level shift
Segment Segment Segment Segment driver driver driver driver
P00/SEG0 P01/SEG1 P02/SEG2 P03/SEG3
Notes 1: SOURCE represents the supply source of internal clock . XIN input: in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode, Internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode, and sub clock in the low-speed mode.
38D2 Group
* Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD Power Input Pins When the voltage is applied from the LCD power input pins (VL1-VL3), set the VL pin input selection bit (bit 5 of the LCD power control register) and VL3 connection bit (bit 6 of LCD power control register) to "1", apply the voltage value shown in Table 12 according to the bias value. In this case, SEG22 pin and SEG23 pin cannot be used. Select a bias value by the bias control bit (bit 2 of the LCD mode register). * Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control The common pins (COM0-COM3) to be used are determined by duty ratio. Select duty ratio by the duty ratio selection bits (bits 0 and 1 of the LCD mode register). When reset is released, VCC voltage is output from the common pin.
Table 13 Duty ratio control and common pins used Duty ratio 2 3 4 Duty ratio selection bits Common pins used Bit 1 Bit 0 0 1 COM0, COM1 1 0 COM0-COM2 1 1 COM0-COM3
Table 12 Bias control and applied voltage to VL1-VL3 Bias value 1/3 bias 1/2 bias Voltage value VL3 = VLCD VL2 = 2/3 VLCD VL1 = 1/3 VLCD VL3 = VLCD VL2 = VL1 = 1/2 VLCD
Note: Unused common pin outputs the unselected waveform.
Note: VLCD is the maximum value of supplied voltage for the LCD panel.
* Segment Signal Output Pin The segment signal output pins (SEG0-SEG23) are shared with ports P0-P2. When these pins are used as the segment signal output pins, set the direction registers of the corresponding pins to "1", and set the segment output disable register to "0". Also, these pins are set to the input port after reset, the VCC voltage is output by the pull-up resistor.
Contrast adjust
Contrast adjust
VL3 R1 VL2 R2 VL1 R3
VL3 R4 VL2
VL1 R5
1/3 bias
R1 = R2 = R3
1/2 bias
R4 = R5
Fig. 40 Example of circuit at each bias (at external power input)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 48 of 131
38D2 Group
* LCD Power Circuit The LCD power circuit has the dividing resistor for LCD power which can be connected/disconnected with the LCD power control register. To use the LCD, apply a voltage externally to the VL3 pin and set the VL3 connect bit to "1". An external voltage should be applied
b7
even if a voltage equivalent to VCC is used for the VL3 pin. When the LCD is not used, perform either of the following. * Set the VL3 connect bit to "0" and leave the VL3 pin open. * Set the VL3 connect bit to "1" and apply a VCC level to VL3 pin.
b0 LCD power control register (VLCON : address 001416)
Dividing resistor for LCD power control bit (LCDRON) 0 : Internal dividing resistor disconnected from LCD power circuit 1 : Internal dividing resistor connected to LCD power circuit Dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits (RSEL) (Note 1) b2b1 1 0 : Larger resistor 0 1: 0 0: 1 1 : Smaller resistor Not used (Do not write to "1".) VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) (Note 2) 0 : Input invalid 1 : VL input function valid VL3 connection bit 0 : Connect LCD internal VL3 to VCC 1 : Connect LCD internal VL3 to VL3 pin Not used (Do not write to "1".)
Notes 1: When voltage is applied to VL1 to VL3 by using the external resistor, write "102" to dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits. 2: Setting to the VL pin input selection bit (VLSEL) = "1" has the most priority than setting to the port P2 direction register (address 000516) and segment output disable register 2 (address 0FF616).
Fig. 41 Structure of LCD power control register
VL3 connection bit Vcc
VL3 VL pin input selection bit Dividing resistor for LCD power control bit
LCD internal VL3
P27/SEG23/VL2
LCD internal VL2
P26/SEG22/VL1
LCD internal VL1
Dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits Dividing resistor for LCD power
Bias control bit (LCD mode register)
Fig. 42 VL block diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 49 of 131
38D2 Group
* LCD Display RAM The 12-byte area of address 004016 to 004B16 is the designated RAM for the LCD display. When "1" is written to these addresses, the corresponding segments of the LCD display panel are turned on. * LCD Drive Timing For the LCD drive timing, type A or type B can be selected. The LCD drive timing is selected by the timing selection bit (bit 4 of LCD mode register). Type A is selected by setting the LCD drive timing selection bit to "0", type B is selected by setting the bit to "1". Type A is selected after reset. The LCDCK timing frequency (LCD drive timing) is generated internally and the frame frequency can be determined with the following equation; f(LCDCK) = (frequency of count source for LCDCK) (divider division ratio for LCD) f(LCDCK) duty ratio
Frame frequency =
(1) When the STP instruction is executed, the following bits are set to "0"; * LCD enable bit (bit 3 of LCD mode register) * Bits other than bit 6 of the LCD power control register. And the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". (2) When the voltage is applied to VL1 to VL3 by using the external resistor, write "102" to dividing resistor for LCD power selection bits (RSEL) of the LCD power control register (address 003816). (3) When the LCD drive control circuit is used at VL3 = VCC, apply VCC to VL3 pin and write "1" to VL3 connection bit of the LCD power control register (address 003816).
Bit Address
7
6 SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23
5
4
3
2
1
0
004016 004116 004216 004316 004416 004516 004616 004716 004816 004916 004A16 004B16
SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22
COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0
Fig. 43 LCD display RAM map
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 50 of 131
38D2 Group
Internal signal LCDCK timing
1/4 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0
Voltage level VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
VL3 VSS
LCD COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 VL3 VSS VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
LCD
ON COM0
OFF COM2
ON COM1 COM0
OFF COM2
ON COM1 COM0
OFF COM2
1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0 VL3 VSS ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
LCD
Fig. 44 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias, type A)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 51 of 131
38D2 Group
Internal signal LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
Voltage level VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0
VL3 VSS
LCD COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 VL3 VSS LCD ON COM0 1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0 VL3 VSS LCD ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS OFF COM2 ON COM1 COM0 OFF COM2 ON COM1 COM0 OFF COM2 VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
Fig. 45 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias, type A)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 52 of 131
38D2 Group
Internal signal LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
1 frame 1 frame
Voltage level VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0
VL3 VSS
LCD COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0
1 frame
1 frame
VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
VL3 VSS
LCD
ON COM0
OFF COM2
ON COM1 COM0
OFF COM2
ON COM1 COM0
OFF COM2
1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0
1 frame
1 frame
1 frame
1 frame
VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
VL3 VSS
LCD
ON COM1
OFF COM0
ON COM1
OFF COM0
ON COM1
OFF COM0
ON COM1
OFF COM0
Fig. 46 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias, type B)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 53 of 131
38D2 Group
Internal signal LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
1 frame 1 frame
Voltage level VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
LCD COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0
1 frame
1 frame
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS ON COM0 OFF COM2 ON COM1 COM0 OFF COM2 ON COM1 COM0 OFF COM2
LCD
1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0
1 frame
1 frame
1 frame
1 frame
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0
LCD
Fig. 47 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias, type B)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 54 of 131
38D2 Group
ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION A part of program in ROM can be corrected. Set the start address of the corrected ROM data (i.e. an Op code address of the beginning instruction) to the ROM correction address high-order and low-order registers. When the program is being executed and the value of the program counter matches with the set address value in the ROM correction address registers, the program is branched to the ROM correction vectors and then the correction program can be executed by setting it to the ROM correction vectors. Use the JMP instruction (3-byte instruction) to return the main program from the correction program. The correctable area is up to two. There are two vectors for ROM correction. Also, ROM correction vector can be selected from the RAM area or ROM area by the ROM correction memory selection bit.
ROM correction address 1 high-order register (RCA1H) ROM correction address 1 low-order register (RCA1L) ROM correction address 2 high-order register (RCA2H) ROM correction address 2 low-order register (RCA2L) Note: Do not set address other than ROM area.
0FF816 0FF916 0FFA16 0FFB16
Fig. 48 ROM correction address register
000016 004016
SFR area
Zero page
Vector 1 Vector 2
RAM area RC2 = "0" address 010016 address 012016
ROM area RC2 = "1" address F10016 address F12016
RAM
010016 ROM correction vector 1 012016 ROM correction vector 2 02BF16
The ROM correction function is controlled by the ROM correction address 1 enable bit and ROM correction address 2 enable bit. If the ROM correction function is not used, the ROM correction vector may be used as normal RAM/ROM. When using the ROM correction vector as normal RAM/ROM, make sure to set bits 1 and 0 in the ROM correction enable register to "0" (Disable). 1. When using the ROM correction function, set the ROM correction address registers and then enable the ROM correction with the ROM correction enable register. 2. Do not set addresses other than the ROM area in the ROM correction address registers. Do not set the same ROM correction addresses in both the ROM correction address registers 1 and ROM correction address registers 2. 3. It is necessary to contain the process for ROM correction in the program.
~ ~
C00016 C08016 Reserved ROM area
~ ~
Protect area 1
EFFF16 F10016 ROM correction vector 1 ROM F12016 ROM correction vector 2 FF0016 FFDB16 FFFF16
Special page
Reserved ROM area Interrupt vector area
Fig. 49 Memory map of M38D24G4
b7
b0 ROM correction enable register (Address 0FFC16) RCR ROM correction address 1 enable bit (RC0) 0 : Disable 1 : Enable ROM correction address 2 enable bit (RC1) 0 : Disable 1 : Enable ROM correction memory selection bit (RC2) 0 : Branch to the RAM area 1 : Branch to the ROM area Not used (returns "0" when read) Note: After ROM correction address register is set, set the ROM correction address enable bit to be enabled.
Fig. 50 Structure of ROM correction enable register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 55 of 131
38D2 Group
WATCHDOG TIMER The watchdog timer gives a mean of returning to the reset status when a program cannot run on a normal loop (for example, because of a software run-away). The watchdog timer consists of an 8-bit counter. * Initial Value of Watchdog Timer At reset or writing to the watchdog timer control register, each watchdog timer is set to "FF16". Instructions such as STA, LDM and CLB to generate the write signals can be used. The written data in bits 7, 6 or 5 are not valid, and the above values are set. Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after releasing reset. After rewriting it is disable to write any data to this bit. This bit becomes "0" after reset. * Standard Operation of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is in the stop state at reset and the watchdog timer starts to count down by writing an optional value in the watchdog timer control register. An internal reset occurs at an underflow of the watchdog timer. Then, reset is released after the reset release time is elapsed, the program starts from the reset vector address. Normally, writing to the watchdog timer control register before an underflow of the watchdog timer is programmed. If writing to the watchdog timer control register is not executed, the watchdog timer does not operate. When reading the watchdog timer control register is executed, the contents of the high-order 5-bit counter, the count source selection bit 2 (bit 5), the STP instruction function selection bit (bit 6), and the count source selection bit (bit 7) are read out. * Bit 6 of Watchdog Timer Control Register 1. When bit 6 of the watchdog timer control register is "0", the MCU enters the stop mode by execution of STP instruction. Just after releasing the stop mode, the watchdog timer restarts counting (Note 1). When executing the WIT instruction, the watchdog timer does not stop. 2. When bit 6 is "1", execution of STP instruction causes an internal reset. When this bit is set to "1" once, it cannot be rewritten to "0" by program. Bit 6 is "0" at reset. 3. The time until the underflow of the watchdog timer register after writing to the watchdog timer control register is executed is as follows (when the bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is "0"); 4. at XIN mode (f(XIN)) = 8 MHz): 32.768 ms 5. at low-speed mode (f(XCIN) = 32 KHz): 8.19s 1. The watchdog timer continues to count even during the wait time set by timer 1 and timer 2 to release the stop state and in the wait mode. Accordingly, write to the watchdog timer control register to not underflow the watchdog timer in this time. 2. When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, the on-chip oscillator forcibly oscillates and it cannot be stopped. Also, in this time, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1" at this time. Select "0" (SOURCE) the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped.
Watchdog timer count sourse selection bit 2 SOURCE
(1)
Watchdog timer count source selection bit
Data bus
"0"
1/1024 1/4
"0" "1"
Watchdog timer L (3) Watchdog timer H (5) "FF16" is set when watchdog timer control register is written to.
On-chip oscillator 1/4
"1"
STP instruction function selection bit
Undefined instruction Reset Reset circuit Wait until reset release
Note1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode
STP instruction
RESET
Internal reset
Fig. 51 Block diagram of watchdog timer
b7 b0 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON : address 002916) Watchdog timer H (for read-out of high-order 5 bit) "FF16" is set to watchdog timer by writing to these bits. Watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 0 : SOURCE (1) 1 : On-chip oscillator/4 STP instruction function selection bit 0 : Entering stop mode by execution of STP instruction 1 : Internal reset by execution of STP instruction Watchdog timer count source selection bit 0 : Count source/1024 1 : Count source/4
Notes 1: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 , or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode 2: When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1". Select (SOURCE) as the count source at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped. 3: Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after reset. After rewriting it is disable to write any data to this bit.
Fig. 52 Structure of watchdog timer control register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 56 of 131
38D2 Group
CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION A system clock can be output from I/O port P36. The triple function of I/O port, timer 2 output function and system clock output function is performed by the clock output control register (address 0FF316) and the timer 2 output selection bit of the timer 12 mode register (address 002516). In order to output a system clock from I/O port P36, set the timer 2 output selection bit and bit 0 of the clock output control register to "1". When the clock output function is selected, a clock is output while the direction register of port P36 is set to the output mode. P36 is switched to the port output or the output (timer 2 output and the clock output) except port at the cycle after the timer 2 output control bit is switched.
b7
b0
Clock output control register (CKOUT : address 0FF316) P36 clock output control bit 0 : Timer 2 output 1 : System clock output Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (Do not write "1" to these bits.)
Fig. 53 Structure of clock output control register
Timer 2 output control bit
Timer 2 latch (8) Timer 2 (8) 1/2
T
S
T2OUT output edge switch bit Q "0" "1" Q "0" P36 clock output control bit P36 latch
P36/T2OUT/CKOUT
P36 direction register
"1"
System clock
Timer 2 output selection bit b7 b0
Timer 12 mode register (address 002516) T12M Timer 2 output selection bit 0 : I/O port 1 : Timer 2 output
Fig. 54 Block diagram of clock output function
Other function registers [RRF register (RRFR)] The RRF register (address 001216) is the 8-bit register and does not have the control function. As for the value written in this register, high-order 4 bits and low-order 4 bits interchange. It is initialized after reset.
b7 b0 RRF register (RRFR : address 001216) DB4 data storage DB5 data storage DB6 data storage DB7 data storage DB0 data storage DB1 data storage DB2 data storage DB3 data storage
Fig. 55 Structure of RRF register
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 57 of 131
38D2 Group
RESET CIRCUIT To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 2 s or more. Then the RESET pin is returned to an "H" level (the power source voltage should be between VCC (min.) and 5.5 V), reset is released. After the reset is completed, the program starts from the address contained in address FFFD16 (high-order byte) and address FFFC16 (low-order byte). Make sure that the reset input voltage meets VIL spec. When a power source voltage passes VCC (min.). In the flash memory version, input to the RESET pin in the following procedure. * When power source is stabilized (1) Input "L" level for 2s or more to RESET pin. (2) Input "H" level to RESET pin. * At power-on (1) Input "L" level to RESET pin. (2) Increase the power source voltage to 2.7 V. (3) Wait for td(P-R) until internal power source has stabilized. (4) Input "H" level to RESET pin. In the QzROM version, the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H".
VCC VCC (min.) RESET VCC 0V RESET 0V
(1)
0.2VCC or less
5V VCC 0V 5V RESET VCC RESET 0V
2.7 V
td(P-R) or more
Power source voltage detection circuit
Note 1: QzROM version: 2 s or more Flash memory version: td(P-R) or more
Fig. 56 Reset circuit example
OSCSEL=L: OCO OSCSEL=H: XIN
******
System clock
RESET
Internal reset Address Data
Reset address from vector table
?
?
?
?
FFFC ADL
FFFD
ADH, ADL
ADH
SYNC OSCSEL=L: OCO= about 32768 cycles OSCSEL=H: XIN= about 8192 cycles Notes 1: The frequency of system clock is f(OCO)/32 or f(XIN)/8. 2: The question marks (?) indicate an undefined state. 3: In the QzROM version, the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H".
Fig. 57 Reset sequence
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 58 of 131
38D2 Group
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Port P0 Port P0 direction register Port P1 Port P1 direction register Port P2 Port P2 direction register Port P3 Port P3 direction register Port P4
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16
Register contents 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016
(36) Timer X (low-order) (37) Timer X (high-order) (38) Timer X (extension) (39) Timer X mode register (40) Timer X control register 1 (41) Timer X control register 2 (42) Compare register 1 (low-order) (44) Compare register 2 (low-order) (46) Compare register 3 (low-order) (48) Timer Y (low-order) (49) Timer Y (high-order) (50) Timer Y mode register (51) Timer Y control register (53) CPU mode register (54) Interrupt request register 1 (55) Interrupt request register 2 (56) Interrupt control register 1 (57) Interrupt control register 2 (58) PULL register (59) UART2 control register (60) Clock output control register
Address 002A16 002B16 002C16 002D16 002E16 002F16 003016 003216 003416 003616 003716 003816 003916
Register contents FF16 FF16 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 FF16 FF16 0016 0016 0016
(43) Compare register 1 (high-order) 003116 (45) Compare register 2 (high-order) 003316 (47) Compare register 3 (high-order) 003516
(10) Port P4 direction register (11) Port P5 (12) Port P5 direction register (13) Port P6 (14) Port P6 direction register (16) CPU mode register 2 (17) RRF register (18) LCD mode register (19) LCD power control register (20) AD control register (21) Serial I/O1 status register (22) Serial I/O1 control register (23) UART1 control register (24) Serial I/O2 status register (25) Serial I/O2 control register (26) Timer 1 (27) Timer 2 (28) Timer 3 (29) Timer 4 (30) PWM01 register (31) Timer 12 mode register (32) Timer 34 mode register (33) Timer 1234 mode register (34) Timer 1234 frequency division selection register
(15) Oscillation output control register 001016
001116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0016 001216 001316 001416 001516 0016 0016 0816
(52) Interrupt edge selection register 003A16
003B16 * 1 * 0 0 0 0 0 0016 003C16 003D16 003E16 003F16 0FF016 0016 0016 0016 0016
001916 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0016 001A16 001B16 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 001E16 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0016 001F16 002016 002116 002216 002316 002416 002516 002616 002716 002816 FF16 0116 FF16 FF16 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016
0FF116 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0016 0FF316 FF16 FF16 FF16 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016
(61) Segment output disable register 0 0FF416 (62) Segment output disable register 1 0FF516 (63) Segment output disable register 2 0FF616 (64) Key input control register (65) high-order register (RCA1H) ROM correction address 1 (66) low-order register (RCA1L) (67) ROM correction address 2 high-order register (RCA2H) (68) ROM correction address 2 low-order register (RC2AL)
ROM correction address 1
0FF716 0FF816 0FF916 0FFA16 0FFB16
(35) Watchdog timer control register 002916 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
0016 (69) ROM correction enable register 0FFC16 (PS) x x x x x 1 x x (70) Processor status register (PCH) (71) Program counter FFFD16 contents (PCL) FFFC16 contents
x: Not fixed *: Depends on OSCSEL setting at the QzROM version. In the flash memory version, the CPU mode register 2 (address 001116), is set to "0016" and the CPU mode register (address 003B16) is set to "E016". Since the initial values for other than above mentioned registers and RAM contents are indefinite at reset, they must be set.
Fig. 58 Internal status at reset
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 59 of 131
38D2 Group
CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT The oscillation circuit of 38D2 Group can be formed by connecting an oscillator, capacitor and resistor between XIN and XOUT (XCIN and XCOUT). To supply a clock signal externally, input it to the XIN pin and make the XOUT pin open. The clocks that are externally generated cannot be directly input to XCIN. Use the circuit constants in accordance with the oscillator manufacturer's recommended values. No external resistor is needed between XIN and XOUT since a feed-back resistor exists on-chip. (An external feed-back resistor may be needed depending on conditions.) However, an about 10 M external feedback resistor is needed between XCIN and XCOUT. The 38D2 Group operation mode immediately after reset depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version. When the OSCSEL pin state is GND level, the only on-chip oscillator starts oscillating. The XIN-XOUT oscillation stops oscillating, and XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. Flash memory version as same. When the OSCSEL pin state is VCC level, the XIN-XOUT oscillation divided by 8 starts oscillating. The on-chip oscillator stops oscillating, and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. Note the following in each mode. * XIN Mode The XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". * Low-Speed Mode The XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". * On-Chip Oscillator Mode Even if the on-chip oscillator stop bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator oscillation does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. * Frequency Control (1) On-chip oscillation mode The system clock is the on-chip oscillator oscillation divided by 32. (2) XIN mode Frequency/2 mode, frequency /4 mode, and frequency/8 mode are collectively referred as XIN mode. - Frequency/8 Mode The system clock is the frequency of XIN divided by 8. - Frequency/4 Mode The system clock is the frequency of XIN divided by 4. - Frequency/2 Mode The system clock is half the frequency of XIN. (3)Low-speed Mode The system clock is half the frequency of sub clock. After reset and when system returns from the stop mode, the operation mode depends on the OSCSEL pin state in the QzROM version and the flash memory version operation mode is the on-chip oscillator mode. When the RESET pin changes from "L" to "H" and when the STP instruction is executed, determine the input level applied to the OSCSEL pin. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for the setting of transition to each mode. The XIN-OUT oscillation is controlled by the bit 5 of CPUM, and the sub-clock oscillation is controlled by the bit 4 of CPUM and the on-chip oscillator oscillation is controlled by the bit 0 of CPUM2. In the on-chip oscillator mode, the oscillation by the oscillator can be stopped. In the low-speed mode, the power consumption can be reduced by stopping the XIN-XOUT oscillation. In low-speed mode, the on-chip oscillator stops in the QzROM version regardless of the on-chip oscillator stop bit value. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set the on-chip oscillator stop bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. Set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming to restart the stopped oscillation and switch the operation mode. Also, set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming to switch the timer count source. If you switch the mode between on-chip oscillator mode, XIN mode and low-speed mode, stabilize both XIN and XCIN oscillations. Especially be careful immediately after power-on and at returning from stop mode. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for the setting of transition to each mode. Set the frequency in the condition that f(XIN) > 3*f(XCIN). When the XIN mode is not used (XIN-XOUT oscillation and external clock input are not performed), connect XIN to VCC through a resistor.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 60 of 131
38D2 Group
* Oscillation Control (1) Stop Mode If the STP instruction is executed, the system clock stops at an "H" level, and main clock and sub-clock oscillators stop. In this time, values set previously to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch are loaded automatically to timer 1 and timer 2. Set the values * to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch (low-order 8 bits of timer 1 and high-order 8 bits of timer 2) before the STP instruction. The frequency divider for timer 1 is used for the timer 1 count source, and the output of timer 1 is forcibly connected to timer 2. In this time, bits 0 to 5 of the timer 12 mode register are cleared to "0". The values of the timer 1234 frequency divider selection register are not changed. Set the interrupt enable bits of the timer 1 and timer 2 to be disabled ("0") before executing the STP instruction. *: Reference (Set values according to your oscillator and system.) OSCSEL = "L" of the QzROM version and flash memory version: .......................................................................... 000516 or more OSCSEL = "H" of the QzROM version: ..........................................................................01FF16 or more When an external interrupt is received, the clock set according to the OSCSEL pin state starts oscillating in the QzROM version. The operation mode at returning is decided by the clock that set according to the OSCSEL pin state. Bits 3, 5, 6, and 7 of CPUM and bit 0 of CPUM2 are forcibly changed by the OSCSEL pin state. In the flash memory version, the on-chip oscillator starts oscillating and the operation mode at returning is set to on-chip oscillator mode. The bit 3 of CPUM is changed to "0", bits 5, 6 and 7 of CPUM are changed to "1", and the bit 0 of CPUM2 is changed to "0" forcibly. Oscillator restarts when reset occurs or an interrupt request is received, but the system clock is not supplied to the CPU until timer 2 underflows. This allows time for the clock circuit oscillation to stabilize. (2) Wait Mode If the WIT instruction is executed, only the system clock stops at an "H" state. The states of main clock, on-chip oscillator and sub clock are the same as the state before executing the WIT instruction, and oscillation does not stop. Since supply of system clock is started immediately after the interrupt is received, the instruction can be executed immediately.
XCIN XCOUT Rf CCIN Rd CCOUT
XIN
XOUT Rd
CIN
COUT
Note : Insert a damping resistor if required. The resistance will vary depending on the oscillator and the oscillation drive capacity setting. Use the value recommended by the maker of the oscillator. Also, if the oscillator manufacturer's data sheet specifies that a feedback resistor be added external to the chip though a feedback resistor exists on-chip, insert a feedback resistor between XIN and XOUT following the instruction.
Fig. 59 Ceramic resonator circuit example
XCIN
Rf
XCOUT Rd CCOUT
XIN
XOUT Open
External oscillation circuit CCIN VCC VSS
Fig. 60 External clock input circuit
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 61 of 131
38D2 Group
On-chip oscillator
CPUM2 BIT0 On-chip oscillator stop bit "0"
1/4 XIN
(2)
XOUT
Main clock division ratio selection bit CPUM BIT7, 6 "11" "00" "01" "10"
XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit CPUM BIT5
"0" "1"
Internal system clock selection bit CPUM BIT3 (1) SOURCE
(3)
XCIN
XCOUT
Timer 1 count source selection bits "01"
Frequency divider for Timer 1/2 1/2 1/2
Timer 1
"00"
Timer 2 count source selection bits "00"
Timer 2
"10"
"1" Port Xc switch bit CPUM BIT4 "0" Main clock division ratio selection bit
"1" "0" CPUM BIT6
"0" Internal system clock selection bit "1"
System clock
QS R STP instruction WIT instruction
S R
Q
QS R STP instruction
Reset Interrupt disable flag I Interrupt request Notes 1: When the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation is selected as the system clock, set the port Xc switch bit to "1". 2: Although a feed-back resistor exists on-chip, an external feed-back resistor may be needed depending on conditions. 3: SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode *Sub-clock in the low-speed mode However, when used as the A/D conversion clock by the A/D converter, SOURCE indicates the followings: *XIN input in the frequency/2, 4, or 8 mode *On-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the low-speed or the on-chip oscillator mode
Fig. 61 Clock generating circuit block diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 62 of 131
38D2 Group
On-chip oscillator mode
XIN stop XCIN stop OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=1 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=0 CM5 XIN oscillation XCIN stop OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=0 XIN stop XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=1 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=0 CM5 XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation =f(OCO)/32 CM7=1 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=0
Low-speed mode
XIN stop XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=1 (invalid) CM6=1 (invalid) CM5=1 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 CM5 (CM7) XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=0 (invalid) CM6=1 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1 CM6
(14)
CM4
CM3, CM8
(6)
CM4 CM5
* QzROM version * Flash memory version OSCSEL=L
CM3, CM7, CM8
(6)
CM4
CM6 CM5 (CM7)
CM6 CM5
CM6 (CM7) XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=1 (invalid) CM6=0 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1
Reset release
(6)
CM7
(6)
CM7
CM3
Frequency/8 mode
* QzROM version OSCSEL=H XIN oscillation (frequency/8) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/8 CM7=0 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/8) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/8 CM7=0 CM6=1 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=*
CM4
XIN oscillation XCIN oscillation OCO stop =f(XCIN)/2 CM7=0 (invalid) CM6=0 (invalid) CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=1 CM8=1
CM3 CM6 CM7 CM3
CM6
CM6
CM6 CM7
Frequency/2 mode
XIN oscillation (frequency/2) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/2 CM7=0 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/2) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/2 CM7=0 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=*
Frequency/4 mode
XIN oscillation (frequency/4) XCIN stop OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/4 CM7=1 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=0 CM3=0 CM8=* XIN oscillation (frequency/4) XCIN oscillation OCO oscillation or stop =f(XIN)/4 CM7=1 CM6=0 CM5=0 CM4=1 CM3=0 CM8=*
CM4
CM4
* : The OCO oscillating at "0"; the OCO stopped at "1". b7 Notes 1: Switch the mode by the arrows shown between the mode blocks. The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode. 2: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode. System is returned to the source mode when the wait mode is ended. 3: The CM4 value is retained in the stop mode. When the stop mode is ended, the operation mode varies as follows: In the QzROM version: Mode set by the OSCSEL pin state In the flash memory version: On-chip oscillator mode The input level applied to the OSCSEL pin is determined when executing the STP instruction. 4: Before executing the STP instruction, set the values to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 and timer 2, and set to "0" (interrupts disabled) to the interrupt enable bits of timer 1 and timer 2. 5: Execute the transition after the oscillation used in the destination mode is stabilized. 6: When system goes to on-chip oscillator mode, the oscillation stabilizing wait time is not needed. 7: The on-chip oscillator can be stopped in all kinds of state of frequency/ 2,4 mode. 8: In all XIN mode, stop of on-chip oscillator is enabled. 9: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. f(OCO) indicates the oscillation frequency of onchip oscillator. 10: When selecting the on-chip oscillator for the WDT clock, the on-chip oscillator does not stop. Also, in low-speed mode, the on-chip oscillator stops in the QzROM version regardless of the on-chip oscillator stop bit value. The on-chip oscillator does not stop in the flash memory version, so set this bit to "1" to stop the oscillation. In on-chip oscillator mode, even if this bit is set to "1", the on-chip oscillator oscillation does not stop in the flash memory version, but stops in the QzROM version. 11: In low-speed mode, the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation stops if the port XC switch bit is set to "0". 12: In XIN mode, the XIN-XOUT oscillation does not stop even if the XINXOUT oscillation stop bit is set to "1". 13: 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. 14: In the flash memory version, set the on-chip oscillator stop bit to "1" (oscillation stops) because OCO is in the state set by the setting value of the on-chip oscillator stop bit. b0 CM8 CPU mode register 2 CPUM2 (address 001116, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, ( Flash memory version, On-chip oscillator stop bit 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Not used (do not write "1") Not used (returns "0" when read) Not used (do not write "1") CPU mode register CPUM (address 003B16, QzROM version, OSCSEL=L, ( QzROM version, OSCSEL=H, ( Flash memory version, Processor mode bits
b1 b0
initial value: 0016) initial value: 0116) initial value: 0016)
b7
b0
CM7 CM6 CM5 CM4 CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0
initial value: E016) initial value: 4016) initial value: E016)
0 0 : Single-chip mode 0 1: 1 0 : Not available 1 1: Stack page selection bit 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page Internal system clock selection bit 0 : Main clock selected (includes OCO, XIN) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected Port Xc switch bit (11) 0 : I/O port function (Oscillation stop) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT oscillating function XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (12) 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Main clock division ratio selection bit (Valid only when CM3=0) (13)
b7 b8
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
: : : :
f(XIN)/2 (frequency/2 mode) f(XIN)/8 (frequency/8 mode) f(XIN)/4 (frequency/4 mode) On-chip oscillator
Fig. 62 State transitions of system clock
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 63 of 131
38D2 Group
* Oscillation External Output Function The 38D2 group has the oscillation external output function to output the rectangular waveform of the clock obtained by the oscillation circuits from P41 and P40. In order to validate the oscillation external output function, set P40 or P41, or both to the output mode (set the corresponding direction register to "1"). The level of the XCOUT external output signal becomes "H" by the P40/P41 oscillation output control bits (bits 0 and 1) of the oscillation output control register (address 001016) in the following states; * the function to output the signal from the XCOUT pin externally is selected * the sub clock (XCIN-XCOUT) is in the stop oscillating or stop mode. Likewise, the level of the XOUT external output signal becomes "H" by the P40/P41 oscillation output control bits (bits 0 and 1) of the oscillation output control register (address 001016) in the following states; * the function to output the signal from the XOUT pin externally is selected * the main clock (XIN-XOUT) is in the stop oscillating or stop mode.
P61/XCIN P62/XCOUT
When the signal from the XOUT pin or XCOUT pin of the oscillation circuit is input directly to the circuit except this MCU and used, the system operation may be unstabilized. In order to share the oscillation circuit safely, use the clock output from P40 and P41 by this function for the circuits except this MCU.
b7 b0 Oscillation output control register (OSCOUT : address 001016) P40/P41 oscillation output control bits b1 b0 0 0 : P41, P40 = Normal port 0 1 : P41 = Normal port, P40 = XOUT 1 0 : P41 = Normal port, P40 = XCOUT 1 1 : P41 = XCOUT , P40 = XOUT Not used (Do not write to "1".)
Fig. 63 Structure of oscillation output control register
Port XC switch bit (CPUM Bit 4)
P41 output latch P40 output latch Oscillation output selection circuit XIN XOUT P41 direction register P41/OOUT1 P40/OOUT0 P40 direction register OSCOUT control
XIN-XOUT oscillation stop bit (CPUM Bit 5)
Q
S R STP instruction
Reset Interrupt disable flag I Interrupt request
Fig. 64 Block diagram of oscillation external output function
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 64 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM WRITING MODE In the QzROM writing mode, the user ROM area can be rewritten while the microcomputer is mounted on-board by using a serial programmer which is applicable for this microcomputer. Table 14 lists the pin description (QzROM writing mode) and Figure 65 shows the pin connection. Refer to Figure 66 to Figure 69 for examples of a connection with a serial programmer. Contact the manufacturer of your serial programmer for serial programmer. Refer to the user 's manual of your serial programmer for details on how to use it.
Table 14 Pin description (QzROM writing mode) Pin VCC, VSS RESET XIN XOUT VREF AVSS P00-P07 P10-P17 P20-P27 P33-P37 P40-P47 P50-P57 P60-P62 OSCSEL P32 P31 P30 Name Power source Reset input Clock input Clock output Analog reference voltage Analog power source I/O port I/O Input Input Input Output Input Input I/O Function * Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. * Reset input pin for active "L". Reset occurs when RESET pin is held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. * Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. * Input the reference voltage of A/D converter to VREF. * Connect AVss to Vss. * Input "H" or "L" level signal or leave the pin open.
VPP input ESDA input/output ESCLK input ESPGMB input
Input I/O Input Input
* QzROM programmable power source pin. * Serial data I/O pin. * Serial clock input pin. * Read/program pulse input pin.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 65 of 131
38D2 Group
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6
P05/SEG5 P06/SEG6 P07/SEG7 P10/SEG8 P11/SEG9 P12/SEG10 P13/SEG11 P14/SEG12 P15/SEG13 P16/SEG14 P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16 P21/SEG17 P22/SEG18 P23/SEG19
P04/SEG 4
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
M38D2XGXFP/HP
P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 ESPGMB P30/SRDY2/(LED0) P31/SCLK2/(LED1) ESCLK ESDA P32/TXD2/(LED2) P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6)
VPP RESET GND Vcc
RESET P62/XCOUT P61/XCIN VSS XIN XOUT VCC P60/CNTR1 P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7)
P42/ADKEY/AN2 P41/OOUT1/AN1 P40/OOUT0/AN0 OSCSEL
P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3
*
* : Connect to oscillation circuit. : QzROM pin
Package type : PLQP0064GA-A(64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A(64P6Q-A)
Fig. 65 Pin connection diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 66 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM version
38D2 Group
Vcc Vcc OSCSEL 4.7 k
4.7 k P32 (ESDA) P31 (ESCLK) P30 (ESPGMB) RESET circuit *1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. *1 : Open-collector buffer Note : For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.
Fig. 66 When using E8 programmer, connection example (1) (OSCSEL = "L")
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 67 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM version
38D2 Group
Vcc VCC
*2
Jumper switch
OSCSEL
4.7 k
4.7 k P32 (ESDA) P31 (ESCLK) P30 (ESPGMB) RESET circuit
*1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode.
*1 : Open-collector buffer *2 : When programming 38D2 Group is performed, disconnect Vcc from OSCSEL by a jumper switch. Note : For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.
Fig. 67 When using E8 programmer, connection example (2) (OSCSEL = "H")
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 68 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM version
38D2 Group T_VDD
Vcc
T_VPP
4.7k
OSCSEL
T_TXD T_RXD T_SCLK T_BUSY T_PGM/OE/MD RESET circuit T_RESET GND N.C.
4.7k P32 (ESDA)
P31 (ESCLK)
P30 (ESPGMB)
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. Note: For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.
Fig. 68 When using programmer of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example (1) (OSCSEL = "L")
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 69 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM version
38D2 Group
T_VDD
Vcc
T_VPP T_TXD T_RXD T_SCLK T_BUSY T_PGM/OE/MD RESET circuit T_RESET GND N.C.
Jumper switch
*1
OSCSEL 4.7k
4.7k P32 (ESDA) P31 (ESCLK)
P30 (ESPGMB)
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. *1 : When programming QzROM is performed, disconnect Vcc from OSCSEL by a jumper switch. Note: For the programming circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47 pF.
Fig. 69 When using programmer of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example (2) (OSCSEL = "H")
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 70 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY MODE The 38D2 Group flash memory version has the flash memory that can be rewritten with a single power source. For this flash memory, three flash memory modes are available in which to read, program, and erase: the parallel I/O and standard serial I/O modes in which the flash memory can be manipulated using a programmer and the CPU rewrite mode in which the flash memory can be manipulated by the Central Processing Unit (CPU). For details of each mode, refer to the next and after pages. Contact the manufacturer of your programmer for the programmer. Refer to the user's manual of your programmer for details on how to use it. Performance overview Table 15 lists the performance overview of the 38D2 Group flash memory version. This flash memory version has some blocks on the flash memory as shown in Figure 70 and each block can be erased. In addition to the ordinary User ROM area to store the MCU operation control program, the flash memory has a Boot ROM area that is used to store a program to control rewriting in CPU rewrite and standard serial I/O modes. This Boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. However, the user can write a rewrite control program in this area that suits the user's application system. This Boot ROM area can be rewritten in only parallel I/O mode.
Table 15 Performance overview of 38D2 Group flash memory version Parameter Power source voltage (Vcc) Program/Erase VPP voltage (VPP) Flash memory mode Erase block division User ROM area/Data ROM area Boot ROM area (1) Program method Erase method Program/Erase control method Number of commands Number of program/Erase times ROM code protection NOTE: Function VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V 3 modes; Parallel I/O mode, Standard serial I/O mode, CPU rewrite mode Refer to Figure 70. Not divided (4K bytes) In units of bytes Block erase Program/Erase control by software command 5 commands 100 Available in parallel I/O mode and standard serial I/O mode
1. The Boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. This Boot ROM area can be erased and written in only parallel I/O mode.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 71 of 131
38D2 Group
Boot Mode The control program for CPU rewrite mode must be written into the User ROM or Boot ROM area in parallel I/O mode beforehand. (If the control program is written into the Boot ROM area, the standard serial I/O mode becomes unusable.) See Figure 70 for details about the Boot ROM area. Normal microcomputer mode is entered when the microcomputer is reset with pulling CNVSS pin low. In this case, the CPU starts operating using the control program in the User ROM area. When the microcomputer is reset and the CNVSS pin high after pulling the P32/TxD2 pin and CNVSS pin high, the CPU starts operating (start address of program is stored into addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16) using the control program in the Boot ROM area. This mode is called the "Boot mode". Also, User ROM area can be rewritten using the control program in the Boot ROM area. Block Address Block addresses refer to the maximum address of each block. These addresses are used in the block erase command. CPU Rewrite Mode In CPU rewrite mode, the internal flash memory can be operated on (read, program, or erase) under control of the Central Processing Unit (CPU). In CPU rewrite mode, only the User ROM area shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten; the Boot ROM area cannot be rewritten. Make sure the program and block erase commands are issued for only the User ROM area and each block area. The control program for CPU rewrite mode can be stored in either User ROM or Boot ROM area. In the CPU rewrite mode, because the flash memory cannot be read from the CPU, the rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM area before it can be executed.
000016 User ROM area SFR area 004016 RAM 083F16 Block 1: 26K bytes 0FE016 SFR area 0FFF16 100016 800016 Internal RAM area (2K bytes) 140016 180016 100016 Data block B: 1K bytes Data block A: 1K bytes
Internal flash memory area (60K bytes)
Block 0: 32 K bytes
Notes1: The boot ROM area can be rewritten in a parallel I/O mode. (Access to except boot ROM area is disabled.) 2: To specify a block, use the maximum address in the block. 3: The QzROM version has the reserved ROM area. Note the difference of the area. F00016 Boot ROM area 4K bytes
FFFF16
FFFF16
FFFF16
Fig 70. Block diagram of built-in flash memory
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 72 of 131
38D2 Group
Outline Performance CPU rewrite mode is usable in the single-chip or Boot mode. The only User ROM area can be rewritten. In CPU rewrite mode, the CPU erases, programs and reads the internal flash memory as instructed by software commands. This rewrite control program must be transferred to internal RAM area before it can be executed. The MCU enters CPU rewrite mode by setting "1" to the CPU rewrite mode select bit (bit 1 of address 0FE016). Then, software commands can be accepted. Use software commands to control program and erase operations. Whether a program or erase operation has terminated normally or in error can be verified by reading the status register. Figure 71 shows the flash memory control register 0. Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 0 is the RY/BY status flag used exclusively to read the operating status of the flash memory. During programming and erase operations, it is "0" (busy). Otherwise, it is "1" (ready). Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 0 is the CPU rewrite mode select bit. When this bit is set to "1", the MCU enters CPU rewrite mode. And then, software commands can be accepted. In CPU rewrite mode, the CPU becomes unable to access the internal flash memory directly. Therefore, use the control program in the internal RAM for write to bit 1. To set this bit 1 to "1", it is necessary to write "0" and then write "1" in succession to bit 1. The bit can be set to "0" by only writing "0". Bit 2 of the flash memory control register 0 is the user block 1 E/W enable bit. By setting combination of bit 4 (user block 0 E/W enable bit) of the flash memory control register 2 (address 0FE216) and this bit as shown in Table 16, E/W is disabled to user block in the CPU rewriting mode. Bit 3 of the flash memory control register 0 is the flash memory reset bit used to reset the control circuit of internal flash memory. This bit is used when flash memory access has failed. When the CPU rewrite mode select bit is "1", setting "1" for this bit resets the control circuit. To release the reset, it is necessary to set this bit to "0". Bit 5 of the flash memory control register 0 is the User ROM area select bit and is valid only in the boot mode. Setting this bit to "1" in the boot mode switches an accessible area from the boot ROM area to the user ROM area. To use the CPU rewrite mode in the boot mode, set this bit to "1". To rewrite bit 5, execute the user original reprogramming control software transferred to the internal RAM in advance. Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 0 is the program status flag. This bit is set to "1" when writing to flash memory is failed. When program error occurs, the block cannot be used. Bit 7 of the flash memory control register 0 is the erase status flag. This bit is set to "1" when erasing flash memory is failed. When erase error occurs, the block cannot be used. Figure 72 shows the flash memory control register 1. Bit 0 of the flash memory control register 1 is the Erase suspend enable bit. By setting this bit to "1", the erase suspend mode to suspend erase processing temporary when block erase command is executed can be used. In order to set this bit 0 to "1", writing "0" and "1" in succession to bit 0. In order to set this bit to "0", write "0" only to bit 0. Bit 1 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend request bit. By setting this bit to "1" when erase suspend enable bit is "1", the erase processing is suspended. Bit 6 of the flash memory control register 1 is the erase suspend flag. This bit is cleared to "0" at the flash erasing.
b7
b0
Flash memory control register 0 (FMCR0: address : 0FE016, initial value: 0116)
RY/BY status flag 0 : Busy (being written or erased) 1 : Ready CPU rewrite mode select bit(1) 0 : CPU rewrite mode invalid 1 : CPU rewrite mode valid User block 1 E/W enable bit(1, 2) 0 : E/W disabled (180016-7FFF16) 1 : E/W enabled (180016-7FFF16) Flash memory reset bit(3, 4) 0 : Normal operation 1 : reset Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) User ROM area select bit(5) 0 : Boot ROM area is accessed 1 : User ROM area is accessed Program status flag 0: Pass 1: Error Erase status flag 0: Pass 1: Error Notes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to write a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", write "0" only to this bit. 2: This bit can be written only when CPU rewrite mode select bit is "1". 3: Effective only when the CPU rewrite mode select bit = "1". Fix this bit to "0" when the CPU rewrite mode select bit is "0". 4: When setting this bit to "1" (when the control circuit of flash memory is reset), the flash memory cannot be accessed for 10 s. 5: Write to this bit in program on RAM
Fig 71. Structure of flash memory control register 0
b7
b0
Flash memory control register 1 (FMCR1: address: 0FE116, initial value: 4016)
Erase Suspend enable bit(1) 0 : Suspend invalid 1 : Suspend valid Erase Suspend request bit(2) 0 : Erase restart 1 : Suspend request Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) Erase Suspend flag 0 : Erase active 1 : Erase inactive (Erase Suspend mode) Not used (do not write "1" to this bit.) Notes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to write a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", write "0" only to this bit. 2: Effective only when the suspend enable bit = "1".
Fig 72. Structure of flash memory control register 1
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 73 of 131
38D2 Group
b7
b0
Flash m em ory control register 2 (FM C R 2: address : 0FE216, initial value: 4516) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (do not w rite "1" to this bit.) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) U ser block 0 E/W enable bit (1, 2) 0 : E/W disabled (800016-FFFF16) 1 : E/W enabled (800016-FFFF16) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) N ot used (return "1" w hen read) N ot used (return "0" w hen read) N otes 1: For this bit to be set to "1", the user needs to w rite a "0" and then a "1" to it in succession. For this bit to be set to "0", w rite "0" only to this bit. 2: Effective only w hen the C PU rew rite m ode select bit = "1".
Fig 73. Structure of flash memory control register 2 Table 16 State of E/W inhibition function
User block 0 E/W enable bit 0 0 1 1 User block 1 E/W enable bit 0 1 0 1 User block 0 Addresses 800016 to FFFF16 E/W disabled E/W disabled E/W enabled E/W enabled User block 1 Addresses 180016 to 7FFF16 E/W disabled E/W enabled E/W disabled E/W enabled Data block Addresses 100016 to 17FF16 E/W enabled E/W enabled E/W enabled E/W enabled
Figure 74 shows a flowchart for setting/releasing CPU rewrite mode.
Start
Single-chip mode or Boot mode
Set CPU mode register(1)
Transfer CPU rewrite mode control program to internal RAM
Jump to control program transferred to internal RAM (Subsequent operations are executed by control program in this RAM)
Set CPU rewrite mode select bit to "1" (by writing "0" and then "1" in succession)
Set user block 0 E/W enable bit to "1" (by writing "0" and then "1" in succession) Set user block 1 E/W enable bit (At E/W disabled; writing "0" , at E/W enabled; writing "0" and then "1" in succession
Using software command executes erase, program, or other operation
Execute read array command(2)
Set user block 0 E/W enable bit to "0" Set user block 1 E/W enable bit to "0"
Write "0" to CPU rewrite mode select bit
End Notes 1: Set the main clock as follows depending on the clock division ratio selection bits of CPU mode register (bits 6, 7 of address 003B16). 2: Before exiting the CPU rewrite mode after completing erase or program operation, always be sure to execute the read array command.
Fig 74. CPU rewrite mode set/release flowchart be sure to execute
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 74 of 131
38D2 Group
Take the notes described below when rewriting the flash memory in CPU rewrite mode. (1) Operation speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock to 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Instructions inhibited against use The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode. (3) Interrupts The interrupts cannot be used during CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. (4) Watchdog timer If the watchdog timer has been already activated, internal reset due to an underflow will not occur because the watchdog timer is surely cleared during program or erase. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. The MCU is activated using the boot mode at release of reset in the condition of CNVSS = "H", so that the program will begin at the address which is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16 of the boot ROM area.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 75 of 131
38D2 Group
Software Commands Table 17 lists the software commands. After setting the CPU rewrite mode select bit to "1", execute a software command to specify an erase or program operation. Each software command is explained below. * Read Array Command (FF16) The read array mode is entered by writing the command code "FF16" in the first bus cycle. When an address to be read is input in one of the bus cycles that follow, the contents of the specified address are read out at the data bus (D0 to D7). The read array mode is retained until another command is written. * Read Status Register Command (7016) When the command code "7016" is written in the first bus cycle, the contents of the status register are read out at the data bus (D0 to D7) by a read in the second bus cycle. The status register is explained in the next section. * Clear Status Register Command (5016) This command is used to clear the bits SR4 and SR5 of the status register after they have been set. These bits indicate that operation has ended in an error. To use this command, write the command code "5016" in the first bus cycle. * Program Command (4016) Program operation starts when the command code "4016" is written in the first bus cycle. Then, if the address and data to program are written in the 2nd bus cycle, program operation (data programming and verification) will start. Whether the write operation is completed can be confirmed by read status register or the RY/BY status flag. To read the status register, write the read status register command "7016". The status register bit 7 (SR7) is set to "0" at the same time the program starts and returned to "1" upon completion of the program. The read status mode remains active until the read array command ("FF16") is written.
Write
The RY/BY status flag is set to "0" during program operation and "1" when the program operation is completed as is the status register bit 7 (SR7). At program end, program results can be checked by reading the status register.
Start
Write "4016" Write address Write data
Read status register
SR7 = "1"? or RY/BY = "1"?
NO
YES NO SR4 = "0"? YES Program completed Program error
Fig 75. Program flowchart
Table 17 List of software commands (CPU rewrite mode)
Command Read array Read status register Clear status register Program Block erase cycle number 1 2 1 2 2
First bus cycle Second bus cycle
Mode Write Write Write Write Write
Address X(4) X X X X
Data (D0 to D7) FF16 7016 5016 4016 2016
Mode
Address
Data (D0 to D7) SRD(1) WD(2) D016
Read Write Write
X WA(2) BA(3)
NOTES:
1. 2. 3. 4.
SRD = Status Register Data WA = Write Address, WD = Write Data BA = Block Address to be erased (Input the maximum address of each block.) X denotes a given address in the User ROM area.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 76 of 131
38D2 Group
* Block Erase Command (2016/D016) By writing the command code "2016" in the first bus cycle and the confirmation command code "D016" and the block address in the second bus cycle that follows, the block erase (erase and erase verify) operation starts for the block address of the flash memory to be specified. Whether the block erase operation is completed can be confirmed by read status register or the RY/BY status flag of flash memory control register. To read the status register, write the status register command "7016". The status register bit 7 (SR7) is set to "0" at the same time the block erase operation starts and returned to "1" upon completion of the block erase operation. The read status mode at this time remains active until the read array command ("FF16") is written. The RY/BY status flag register is set to "0" during block erase operation and "1" when the block erase operation is completed as is the status register bit 7 (SR7). After the block erase ends, erase results can be checked by reading the status register. For details, refer to the section where the status register is detailed.
Start
Write "2016"
Write "D016" Block address
Read status register
SR7 = "1"? or RY/BY = "1"?
NO
YES SR5 = "0"? YES Erase completed (write read command "FF16") NO Erase error
Fig 76. Erase flowchart
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 77 of 131
38D2 Group
* Status Register The status register shows the operating status of the flash memory and whether erase operations and programs ended successfully or in error. It can be read in the following ways: (1) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area after writing the read status register command (7016) (2) By reading an arbitrary address from the User ROM area in the period from when the program starts or erase operation starts to when the read array command (FF16) is input. Also, the status register can be cleared by writing the clear status register command (5016). After reset, the status register is set to "8016". Table 18 shows the status register. Each bit in this register is explained below. * Sequencer status (SR7) The sequencer status indicates the operating status of the flash memory. This bit is set to "0" (busy) during write or erase operation and is set to "1" when these operations ends. After power-on, the sequencer status is set to "1" (ready). * Erase status (SR5) The erase status indicates the operating status of erase operation. If an erase error occurs, it is set to "1". When the erase status is cleared, it is reset to "0". * Program status (SR4) The program status indicates the operating status of write operation. When a write error occurs, it is set to "1". The program status is reset to "0" when it is cleared. If "1" is written for any of the SR5 and SR4 bits, the read array, program, and block erase commands are not accepted. Before executing these commands, execute the clear status register command (5016) and clear the status register. Also, if any commands are not correct, both SR5 and SR4 are set to "1".
Table 18 Definition of each bit in status register
Each bit of SRD bits SR7 (bit7) SR6 (bit6) SR5 (bit5) SR4 (bit4) SR3 (bit3) SR2 (bit2) SR1 (bit1) SR0 (bit0) Status name Sequencer status Reserved Erase status Program status Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Definition "1" Ready - Terminated in error Terminated in error - - - - "0" Busy - Terminated normally Terminated normally - - - -
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 78 of 131
38D2 Group
Full Status Check By performing full status check, it is possible to know the execution results of erase and program operations. Figure 77 shows a full status check flowchart and the action to be taken when each error occurs.
Read status register
SR4 = "1"
and
YES
SR5 = "1"?
Command sequence error
Execute the clear status register command (5016) to clear the status register. Try performing the operation one more time after confirming that the command is entered correctly.
NO SR5 = "0"? YES SR4 = "0"? YES End (block erase, program) NO Program error Should a program error occur, the block in error cannot be used. NO Block erase error Should an erase error occur, the block in error cannot be used.
Note: When one of SR5 and SR4 is set to "1", none of the read array, program, and block erase commands is accepted. Execute the clear status register command (5016) before executing these commands.
Fig 77. Full status check flowchart and remedial procedure for errors
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 79 of 131
38D2 Group
Functions To Inhibit Rewriting Flash Memory Version To prevent the contents of internal flash memory from being read out or rewritten easily, this MCU incorporates a ROM code protect function for use in parallel I/O mode and an ID code check function for use in standard serial I/O mode. * ROM Code Protect Function The ROM code protect function is the function to inhibit reading out or modifying the contents of internal flash memory by using the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) in parallel I/O mode. Figure 78 shows the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16). (This address exists in the User ROM area.) If one or both of the pair of ROM code protect bits is set to "0", the ROM code protect is turned on, so that the contents of internal flash memory are protected against readout and modification. The ROM code protect is implemented in two levels. If level 2 is selected, the flash memory is protected even against readout by a shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. When an attempt is made to select both level 1 and level 2, level 2 is selected by default. If both of the two ROM code protect reset bits are set to "00", the ROM code protect is turned off, so that the contents of internal flash memory can be readout or modified. Once the ROM code protect is turned on, the contents of the ROM code protect reset bits cannot be modified in parallel I/O mode. Use standard serial I/O mode or other modes to rewrite the contents of the ROM code protect disable bits. Rewriting of only the ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) cannot be performed. When rewriting the ROM code protect reset bit, rewrite the whole user ROM area (block 0) containing the ROM code protect control address.
b7 1
b0 1
ROM code protect control address (address FFDB16) ROMCP (FF16 when shipped)
Reserved bits ("1" at read/write) ROM code protect level 2 set bits (ROMCP2)(1, 2) b3b2 0 0: Protect enabled 0 1: Protect enabled 1 0: Protect enabled 1 1: Protect disabled ROM code protect reset bits (ROMCR)(3) b5b4 0 0: Protect removed 0 1: Protect set bits effective 1 0: Protect set bits effective 1 1: Protect set bits effective ROM code protect level 1 set bits (ROMCP1)(1) b7b6 0 0: Protect enabled 0 1: Protect enabled 1 0: Protect enabled 1 1: Protect disabled Notes 1: When ROM code protect is turned on, the internal flash memory is protected against readout or modification in parallel I/O mode. 2: When ROM code protect level 2 is turned on, ROM code readout by a shipment inspection LSI tester, etc. also is inhibited. 3: The ROM code protect reset bits can be used to turn off ROM code protect level 1 and ROM code protect level 2. However, no change can be made in parallel I/O mode. Use serial I/O mode or other modes to change settings.
Fig 78. Structure of ROM code protect control address
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 80 of 131
38D2 Group
* ID Code Check Function Use this function in standard serial I/O mode. When the contents of the flash memory are not blank, the ID code sent from the programmer is compared with the ID code written in the flash memory to see if they match. If the ID codes do not match, the commands sent from the programmer are not accepted. The ID code consists of 8-bit data, and its areas are FFD416 to FFDA16. Write a program which has had the ID code preset at these addresses to the flash memory.
Address FFD416 FFD516 FFD616 FFD716 FFD816 FFD916 FFDA16 FFDB16 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ROM code protect control Interrupt vector area
Fig 79. ID code store addresses
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 81 of 131
38D2 Group
Parallel I/O Mode The parallel I/O mode is used to input/output software commands, address and data in parallel for operation (read, program and erase) to internal flash memory. * User ROM and Boot ROM Areas In parallel I/O mode, the User ROM and Boot ROM areas shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten. Both areas of flash memory can be operated on in the same way. The Boot ROM area is 4 Kbytes in size and located at addresses F00016 through FFFF16. Make sure program and block erase operations are always performed within this address range. (Access to any location outside this address range is prohibited.) In the Boot ROM area, an erase block operation is applied to only one 4 K byte block. The boot ROM area has had a standard serial I/O mode control program stored in it when shipped from the factory. Therefore, using the MCU in standard serial I/O mode, do not rewrite to the Boot ROM area.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 82 of 131
38D2 Group
Standard serial I/O Mode The standard serial I/O mode inputs and outputs the software commands, addresses and data needed to operate (read, program, erase, etc.) the internal flash memory. This I/O is clock synchronized serial. This mode requires a purpose-specific peripheral unit. The standard serial I/O mode is different from the parallel I/O mode in that the CPU controls flash memory rewrite (uses the CPU rewrite mode), rewrite data input and so forth. The standard serial I/O mode is started by connecting "H" to the CNVSS pin and "H" to the P32 (BOOTENT) pin, and releasing the reset operation. (In the ordinary microcomputer mode, set CNVSS pin to "L" level.) This control program is written in the Boot ROM area when the product is shipped from Renesas. Accordingly, make note of the fact that the standard serial I/O mode cannot be used if the Boot ROM area is rewritten in parallel I/O mode. The standard serial I/ O mode has standard serial I/O mode 1 of the clock synchronous serial and standard serial I/O mode 2 of the clock asynchronous serial. Tables 19 and 20 show description of pin function (standard serial I/O mode). Figure 80 to 82 show the pin connections for the standard serial I/O mode. In standard serial I/O mode, only the User ROM area shown in Figure 70 can be rewritten. The Boot ROM area cannot be written. In standard serial I/O mode, a 7-byte ID code is used. When there is data in the flash memory, this function determines whether the ID code sent from the peripheral unit (programmer) and those written in the flash memory match. The commands sent from the peripheral unit (programmer) are not accepted unless the ID code matches.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 83 of 131
38D2 Group
Table 19 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Standard Serial I/O Mode 1)
Pin name VCC,VSS CNVSS RESET XIN XOUT AVSS VREF P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 P33 P32 P31 P30 Signal name Power supply CNVSS Reset input Clock input Clock output Analog power supply input Reference voltage input I/O port I/O I I I I O I I/O Function Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the VCC pin and 0 V to the Vss pin. After input of port is set, input "H" level. Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins. As for the connection method, refer to the "clock generating circuit". Connect AVss to VSS. Apply reference voltage of A/D convertor to this pin. Input "L" or "H" level, or keep open.
RxD input TxD output SCLK input BUSY output
I O I O
Serial data input pin. Serial data output pin. Serial clock input pin. BUSY signal output pin.
Table 20 Description of pin function (Flash Memory Standard Serial I/O Mode 2)
Pin name VCC,VSS CNVSS RESET XIN XOUT AVSS VREF P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P34-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 P33 P32 P31 P30 Signal name Power supply CNVSS Reset input Clock input Clock output Analog power supply input Reference voltage input I/O port I/O I I I I O I I/O Function Apply 2.7 to 5.5 V to the Vcc pin and 0 V to the VSS pin. After input of port is set, input "H" level. Reset input pin. To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 16 cycles or more of XIN. Connect an oscillation circuit between the XIN and XOUT pins. As for the connection method, refer to the "clock generating circuit". Connect AVss to VSS. Apply reference voltage of A/D convertor to this pin. Input "L" or "H" level, or keep open.
RxD input TxD output SCLK input BUSY output
I O I O
Serial data input pin. Serial data output pin. Input "L" level. BUSY signal output pin.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 84 of 131
38D2 Group
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
P03/SEG3/(KW7) P02/SEG2/(KW6) P01/SEG1/(KW5) P00/SEG0/(KW4) P57/SRDY1/(KW3) P56/SCLK1/(KW2) P55/TXD1/(KW1) P54/RXD1/(KW0) P53/T4OUT/PWM1 P52/T3OUT/PWM0 P51/INT1 P50/INT0 AVSS VREF P47/RTP1/AN7 P46/RTP0/AN6
P05/SEG5 P06/SEG6 P07/SEG7 P10/SEG8 P11/SEG9 P12/SEG10 P13/SEG11 P14/SEG12 P15/SEG13 P16/SEG14 P17/SEG15 P20/SEG16 P21/SEG17 P22/SEG18 P23/SEG19
P04/SEG4
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
M38D29FFFP/HP
P24/SEG20 P25/SEG21 P26/SEG22/VL1 P27/SEG23/VL2 VL3 COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 P30/SRDY2/(LED0) BUSY P31/SCLK2/(LED1) P32/TXD2/(LED2) TxD P33/RXD2/(LED3) P34/INT2/(LED4) P35/TXOUT1/(LED5) P36/T2OUT/CKOUT/(LED6)
SCLK RxD
VPP RESET GND Vcc
P42/AN2/ADKEY P41/OOUT1/AN1 P40/OOUT0/AN0 CNVSS RESET P62/XCOUT P61/XCIN VSS XIN XOUT VCC P60/CNTR1 P37/CNTR0/TXOUT2/(LED7)
P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3
*
*Connect oscillation circuit. indicates flash memory pin.
Package type: PLQP0064GA-A (64P6U-A)/PLQP0064KB-A (64P6Q-A)
Fig 80. Connection for standard serial I/O mode 1
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 85 of 131
38D2 Group
Flash memory version
38D2 Group T_VDD T_VPP N.C. 4.7 k T_RXD T_TXD T_SCLK T_PGM/OE/MD 4.7 k T_BUSY RESET circuit T_RESET GND
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT P30 (BUSY) P32 (TxD) P33 (RxD) Vcc
P31 (SCLK) CNVSS
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. Note 1: For the programmer circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47pF.
Fig 81. When using programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1) of Suisei Electronics System Co., LTD, connection example
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 86 of 131
38D2 Group
Flash memory version
38D2 Group
Vcc Vcc CNVSS 4.7 k
4.7 k
4.7 k P32 (TxD) P33 (RxD) P31 (SCLK) P30 (BUSY) RESET circuit
*1
14 12 10 8 6 4 2
13 11 9 7 5 3 1
RESET Vss AVss XIN XOUT
Set the same termination as the single-chip mode. * 1: Open-collector buffer Note 1: For the programmer circuit, the wiring capacity of each signal pin must not exceed 47pF.
Fig 82. When using E8 programmer (in standard serial I/O mode 1) connection example
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 87 of 131
38D2 Group
Flash memory version
td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET)
Power source RESET CNVSS P32(TXD) P31(SCLK) P30(BUSY) P33(RXD)
Symbol td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET)
Limits Min. 0 0 Typ. Max. -
Unit ms ms
Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 1, input "H" to the P31 pin. Be sure to set the CNVss pin to "H" before rising RESET. Be sure to set the P32 pin to "H" before rising RESET.
Fig 83. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 1
Flash memory version
td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET)
Power source RESET CNVSS P32(TXD) P31(SCLK) P30(BUSY) P33(RXD)
Symbol td(CNVSS-RESET) td(P32-RESET)
Limits Min. 0 0 Typ. Max. -
Unit ms ms
Notes: In the standard serial I/O mode 2, input "H" to the P31 pin. Be sure to set the CNVss pin to "H" before rising RESET. Be sure to set the P32 pin to "H" before rising RESET.
Fig 84. Operating waveform for standard serial I/O mode 2
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 88 of 131
38D2 Group
NOTES ON USE Processor Status Register The contents of the processor status register (PS) after a reset are undefined, except for the interrupt disable flag (I) which is "1". After a reset, initialize flags which affect program execution. In particular, it is essential to initialize the index X mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags because of their effect on calculations. Initialize these flags at biginning of the program. Interrupt The contents of the interrupt request bits do not change immediately after they have been written. After writing to an interrupt request register, execute at least one instruction before performing a BBC or BBS instruction. Decimal Calculations * To calculate in decimal notation, set the decimal mode flag (D) to "1", then execute an ADC or SBC instruction. After executing an ADC or SBC instruction, execute at least one instruction before executing a SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction. * In decimal mode, the values of the negative (N), overflow (V), and zero (Z) flags are invalid. Timers The division ratio is 1/(n+1) when the value n (0 to 255) is written to the timer latch. Multiplication and Division Instructions The index mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags do not affect the MUL and DIV instruction. The execution of these instructions does not change the contents of the processor status register. Direction Registers The values of the port direction registers cannot be read. This means, it is impossible to use the LDA instruction, memory operation instruction when the T flag is "1", addressing mode using direction register values as qualifiers, and bit test instructions such as BBC and BBS. It is also impossible to use bit operation instructions such as CLB and SEB, and read-modifywrite instructions to direction registers, including calculations such as ROR. To set the direction registers, use instructions such as LDM or STA. Serial Interface In clock synchronous serial I/O, if the receive side is using an external clock and it is to output the SRDY signal, set the transmit enable bit, the receive enable bit, and the SRDY output enable bit to "1". Serial I/O continues to output the final bit from the TXD pin after transmission is completed. A/D Converter The comparator is constructed linked to a capacitor. The conversion accuracy may be low because the charge is lost if the conversion speed is not enough. Accordingly, set f(XIN) to at least 500kHz during A/D conversion in the XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP or WIT instruction during an A/D conversion. In the low-speed mode, since the A/D conversion is executed by the on-chip oscillator, the minimum value of f(XIN) frequency is not limited. LCD Drive Control Circuit Execution of the STP instruction sets the LCD enable bit (bit 3 of the LCD mode register) and bits 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the LCD power control register to "0" and the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". Instruction Execution Time The instruction execution time is obtained by multiplying the frequency of the internal clock by the number of cycles needed to execute an instruction. Power Source Voltage When the power source voltage value of a microcomputer is less than the value which is indicated as the recommended operating conditions, the microcomputer does not operate normally and may perform unstable operation. In a system where the power source voltage drops slowly when the power source voltage drops or the power supply is turned off, reset a microcomputer when the power source voltage is less than the recommended operating conditions and design a system not to cause errors to the system by this unstable operation. Handling of Power Source Pin In order to avoid a latch-up occurrence, connect a capacitor suitable for high frequencies as bypass capacitor between power source pin (VCC pin) and GND pin (Vss pin), and between power source pin (VCC pin) and analog power source pin (AVCC). Besides, connect the capacitor to as close as possible. For bypass capacitor which should not be located too far from the pins to be connected, a ceramic capacitor of 0.1 F is recommended. LCD drive power supply Power supply capacitor may be insufficient with the division resistance for LCD power supply, and the characteristic of the LCD panel. In this case, there is the method of connecting the bypass capacitor about 0.1-0.33F to VL1 -VL3 pins. The example of a strengthening measure of the LCD drive power supply is shown below.
VL3
VL2
* Connect by the shortest possible wiring. * Connect the bypass capacitor to the VL1 -VL3 pins as short as possible. (Referential value:0.1-0.33 F)
VL1
Fig. 85 Strengthening measure example of LCD drive power supply
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 89 of 131
38D2 Group
NOTES ON QzROM VERSION Wiring to OSCSEL pin 1. OSCSEL = L Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. 2. OSCSEL = H Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the VCC pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the VCC could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the VCC pin of the microcomputer. * Reason The OSCSEL pin is the power source input pin for the built-in QzROM. When programming in the QzROM, the impedance of the OSCSEL pin is low to allow the electric current for writing to flow into the built-in QzROM. Because of this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the OSCSEL pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from the QzROM, which may cause a program runaway.
Termination of OSCSEL pin (1) OSCSEL = L
(1)
Product shipped in blank As for the product shipped in blank, Renesas does not perform the writing test to user ROM area after the assembly process though the QzROM writing test is performed enough before the assembly process. Therefore, a writing error of approximate 0.1% may occur. Moreover, please note the contact of cables and foreign bodies on a socket, etc. because a writing environment may cause some writing errors. Notes On QzROM Writing Orders When ordering the QzROM product shipped after writing, submit the mask file (extension: .msk) which is made by the mask file converter MM. * Be sure to set the ROM option data* setup when making the mask file by using the mask file converter MM.. The ROM code protect is specified according to the ROM option data* in the mask file which is submitted at ordering. Note that the mask file which has nothing at the ROM option data* or has the data other than "0016", "FE16" and "FF16" can not be accepted. * Set "FF16" to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than "FF16" is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM Data Required For QzROM Writing Orders The following are necessary when ordering a QzROM product shipped after writing: 1. QzROM Writing Confirmation Form* 2. Mark Specification Form* 3. ROM data...........Mask file * For the QzROM writing confirmation form and the mark specification form, refer to the "Renesas Technology Corp." Homepage (http://www.renesas.com/homepage.jsp). Note that we cannot deal with special font marking (customer's trademark etc.) in QzROM microcomputer. QzROM Receive Flow When writing to QzROM is performed by user side, the receiving inspection by the following flow is necessary.
QzROM product shipped after writing
"protect disabled" "protect enabled to the protect area 1"
Renesas Renesas
(2) OSCSEL = H
(1)
The shortest VCC about 5 k
The shortest
OSCSEL
about 5 k OSCSEL
VSS
(1)
The shortest
(1)
The shortest
Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin
Fig. 86 Wiring for the OSCSEL pin
Precautions Regarding Overvoltage in QzROM Version Make sure that voltage exceeding the VCC pin voltage is not applied to other pins. In particular, ensure that the state indicated by bold lines in figure below does not occur for OSCSEL pin (VPP power source pin for QzROM) during power-on or poweroff. Otherwise the contents of QzROM could be rewritten.
QzROM product shipped in blank
Programming
Shipping User
Verify test
Shipping User
Receiving inspection (Blank check)

1.8V VCC pin voltage
(1)
(2)
1.8V
Receiving inspection of unprotected area (Verify test)
Programming

Programming to unprotected area Verify test for all area
OSCSEL pin voltage "H" input OSCSEL pin voltage "L" input
Verify test for unprotected area
(1) Input voltage to other MCU pins rises before VCC pin voltage. (2) Input voltage to other MCU pins falls after VCC pin voltage. Note: The internal circuitry is unstable when VCC is below the minimum voltage specification of 1.8 V (shaded portion), so particular care should be exercised regarding overvoltage.

Fig. 88 QzROM receive flow
Fig. 87 Example of Overvoltage
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 90 of 131
38D2 Group
NOTES ON FLASH MEMORY VERSION CPU Rewrite Mode (1) Operation speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Instructions inhibited against use The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode. (3) Interrupts inhibited against use The interrupts cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. (4) Watchdog timer In case of the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset generated by watchdog timer underflow does not happen, because of watchdog timer is always clearing during program or erase operation. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. In case of CNVSS = "H" when reset is released, boot mode is active. So the program starts from the address contained in address FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. CNVSS Pin The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode. Connect the CNVSS/VPP pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VS S pin of the microcomputer.
Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required.
NOTES ON DIFFERENCES BETWEEN QzROM VERSION AND FLASH MEMORY VERSION The QzROM version and flash memory versions differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, noise immunity, and noise radiation and oscillation circuit constants may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. When switching to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those performed in the flash memory version. Confirm page 11 about the differences of functions.
(1)
The shortest
CNVSS Approx. 5k VSS
(1)
The shortest
Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin.
Fig 89. Wiring for the CNVSS
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 91 of 131
38D2 Group
Countermeasures against noise (1) Shortest wiring length 1. Wiring for RESET pin Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET pin as short as possible. Especially, connect a capacitor across the RESET pin and the VSS pin with the shortest possible wiring (within 20 mm). * Reason The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by the timing necessary conditions. If noise having a shorter pulse width than the standard is input to the RESET pin, the reset is released before the internal state of the microcomputer is completely initialized. This may cause a program runaway.
Noise
XIN XOUT VSS
XIN XOUT VSS
N.G.
Fig. 91 Wiring for clock I/O pins
O.K.
Noise Reset circuit VSS
RESET VSS
N.G.
Reset circuit VSS
(2) Connection of bypass capacitor across VSS line and VCC line In order to stabilize the system operation and avoid the latch-up, connect an approximately 0.1 F bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line as follows: * Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin at equal length. * Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin with the shortest possible wiring. * Use lines with a larger diameter than other signal lines for VSS line and VCC line. * Connect the power source wiring via a bypass capacitor to the VSS pin and the VCC pin.
RESET VSS
VCC
VCC
O.K.
Fig. 90 Wiring for the RESET pin
2. Wiring for clock input/output pins * Make the length of wiring which is connected to clock I/O pins as short as possible. * Make the length of wiring (within 20 mm) across the grounding lead of a capacitor which is connected to an oscillator and the VSS pin of a microcomputer as short as possible. * Separate the VSS pattern only for oscillation from other VSS patterns. * Reason If noise enters clock I/O pins, clock waveforms may be deformed. This may cause a program failure or program runaway. Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise between the VSS level of a microcomputer and the VSS level of an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the microcomputer.
VSS
VSS
N.G.
O.K.
Fig. 92 Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 92 of 131
38D2 Group
(3) Oscillator concerns In order to obtain the stabilized operation clock on the user system and its condition, contact the oscillator manufacturer and select the oscillator and oscillation circuit constants. Be careful especially when range of voltage and temperature is wide. Also, take care to prevent an oscillator that generates clocks for a microcomputer operation from being affected by other signals. 1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines Install a microcomputer (and especially an oscillator) as far as possible from signal lines where a current larger than the tolerance of current value flows. * Reason In the system using a microcomputer, there are signal lines for controlling motors, LEDs, and thermal heads or others. When a large current flows through those signal lines, strong noise occurs because of mutual inductance. 2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently Install an oscillator and a connecting pattern of an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently. Also, do not cross such signal lines over the clock lines or the signal lines which are sensitive to noise. * Reason Signal lines where potential levels change frequently (such as the CNTR pin signal line) may affect other lines at signal rising edge or falling edge. If such lines cross over a clock line, clock waveforms may be deformed, which causes a microcomputer failure or a program runaway. (4) Analog input The analog input pin is connected to the capacitor of a voltage comparator. Accordingly, sufficient accuracy may not be obtained by the charge/discharge current at the time of A/D conversion when the analog signal source of high-impedance is connected to an analog input pin. In order to obtain the A/D conversion result stabilized more, please lower the impedance of an analog signal source, or add the smoothing capacitor to an analog input pin. (5) Difference of memory size When memory size differ in one group, actual values such as an electrical characteristics, A/D conversion accuracy, and the amount of proof of noise incorrect operation may differ from the ideal values. When these products are used switching, perform system evaluation for each product of every after confirming product specification.
1. Keeping oscillator away from large current signal lines
Microcomputer Mutual inductance M Large current GND XIN XOUT VSS
2. Installing oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently
Do not cross. CNTR XIN XOUT VSS
N.G.
Fig. 93 Wiring for a large current signal line/Wiring of signal lines where potential levels change frequently
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 93 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings
QzROM VERSION
Table 21 Absolute maximum ratings
Symbol VCC VI Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50P57, P60-P62 Input voltage VL1 Input voltage VL2 Input voltage VL3 Input voltage RESET, XIN, OSCSEL Output voltage at output port P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 at segment port Output voltage COM0-COM3 Output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 Output voltage XOUT Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Conditions Ratings
-0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3
Unit V V
VI VI VI VI VO VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg
-0.3 to VL2
All voltages are based on VSS. When an input voltage is measured, output transistors are cut off.
VL1 to VL3 VL2 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3
-0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3
V V V V V V V V V mW C C
Ta = 25C - -
300 -20 to 85 -40 to 125
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 94 of 131
38D2 Group
Recommended Operating Conditions
QzROM VERSION
Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VCC Power source voltage (1) Parameter Frequency/2 mode (2) f(XIN) 12.5MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz f(XIN) 2.0MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8.0MHz f(XIN) 4.0MHz Min. 4.5 4.0 2.0 1.8 4.5 2.0 1.8 4.5 2.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.05 x f + 1.9 0 2.5 2.0 0 AVSS 0.7VCC VCC VCC 5.5 VCC Limits Typ. Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
Frequency/4 mode Frequency/8 mode
Low-speed mode On-chip oscillator mode VSS VL3 VREF AVSS VIA VIH When start oscillating (3) Power source voltage LCD power source voltage A/D converter reference voltage Analog power source voltage Analog input voltage AN0-AN7 "H" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 "H" input voltage P00-P03, P31, P33, , P34, P37, P50, 51, P54-P57, P60, P61 2.2V < VCC 5.5V "H" input voltage RESET VCC 2.2V "H" input voltage XIN "L" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 "L" input voltage P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60, P61, OSCSEL 2.2V < VCC 5.5V "L" input voltage RESET VCC 2.2V "L" input voltage XIN
VIH VIH
0.8VCC 0.8VCC 65 x VCC-99 VCC - 100 0.8VCC 0
VCC VCC VCC VCC 0.3VCC
V V V V V
VIH VIL
VIL
0
0.2VCC
V
VIL
0 0 0
VIL
0.2VCC 65 x VCC -99 100 0.2VCC
V V V
NOTES:
1. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 2. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. 3. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operating temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. f: Oscillation frequency (1 MHz f(XIN) 8 MHz) of oscillator. When the 8 MHz oscillation is used, assign "8" to "f".
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 95 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
Table 23 Recommended operating conditions (3) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter "H" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 "H" total peak output current (1) P40-47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" total peak output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 "H" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" total average output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" peak output current (2) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" average output current (3) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" average output current (3) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" average output current (3) P30-P37, P52, P53 Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40
-40
Symbol
Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA
IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg)
IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg)
40 40 110
-20 -20
20 20 90
-2.0 -5.0
5.0 10 30
-1.0 -2.5
2.5 5.0 15
NOTES:
1. The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2. The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3. The average output current is average value measured over 100 ms.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 96 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
Table 24 Recommended operating conditions (4) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1) Parameter Timer X and Timer Y Input frequency (duty cycle 50%) Conditions 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 4.0 VCC < 4.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.0V VCC < 2.0V 4.5 VCC 5.5V 2.0 VCC < 4.5V VCC < 2.0V Min. Limits Typ. Max. 6.25 2 x Vcc -4 Vcc 5 x Vcc -8 16 4 x Vcc -8 2 x Vcc 10 x Vcc -16 6.25 4 Vcc 5 x Vcc -8 16 8.0 20 x Vcc -32 80 Unit MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz kHz
f(Tclk)
Timer X, Timer Y, Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 clock input frequency (Count source frequency of each timer) System clock frequency (1)
f()
f(XIN)
Main clock input frequency (duty cycle 50%) (2)(3) Sub-clock oscillation frequency (duty cycle 50%)(4)(5)
1.0 1.0 1.0 32.768
f(XCIN)
NOTES:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Relationship between system clock frequency and power source voltage is shown in the graph below. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operation temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. 5. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3.


[MHz] 6.25
System clock frequency
[MHz] 16
4.0
Main clock XIN frequency
8.0
2.0
4.0
1.0
0
1.8 2.0
4.0 4.5 Power source voltage
5.5 [V]
1.0 0 1.8 2.0 4.5 Power source voltage 5.5 [V]
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 97 of 131
38D2 Group
Electrical Characteristics
QzROM VERSION
Table 25
Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter "H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 (1) "L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 Test conditions IOH= -2.5mA IOH= -0.6mA VCC=2.5V IOH= -5mA IOH= -1.25mA IOH= -1.25mA VCC=2.5V IOL=5mA IOL=1.25mA IOL=1.25mA VCC=2.5V IOL=10mA IOL=2.5mA IOL=2.5mA VCC=2.5V IOL=15mA IOL=3.0mA VCC=2.5V Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-1.0 VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VCC-1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 0.8 0.5 Limits Typ. Max. Unit V
Symbol VOH
VOH
V
VOL
V
VOL
"L" output voltage P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P61 (1) "L" output voltage P30-P37, P52, P53 Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT2, KW0-KW7 Hysteresis RXD1, RXD2, SCLK1, SCLK2 Hysteresis RESET "H" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "H" input current RESET, OSCSEL "H" input current XIN "L" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60- P62 "L" input current RESET, OSCSEL "L" input current XIN On-chip oscillator frequency
V
VOL
V
VT+ - VT-
V
VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT- IIH IIH
0.5 VCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V on RESET VI=VCC VI=VCC 0.5 5.0 5.0
V V
A A
IIH IIH IIL
VI=VCC VI=VCC VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS VI=VSS VCC=5.0V, Ta =25C 2500 4.0
5.0
A A
-60 -25 -30 -6.5
-120 -50 -70 -25
IIL
IIL IIL f(OCO)
-5.0 -240 -100 -5.0 -140 -45 -5.0
A A A A A A A A
-4.0
5000
7500
kHz
NOTE:
1. When the port Xc switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register is "1", the drivability of P62 is different from the above.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 98 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
Table 26 Electrical characteristics (2) (Vcc = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz, output transistors in the cut-off state, A/D converter stopped, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VRAM ICC Parameter RAM hold voltage Power source current Test conditions When clock is stopped Frequency/2 mode VCC=5.0V Min. 1.8 Limits Typ. 6.4 1.5 2.2 0.6 0.3 0.4 3.5 1.5 1.5 0.8 0.3 0.5 2.5 1.5 1.2 0.5 0.3 0.3 17 5.5 7.0 3.5 270 35 25 0.1 Max. 5.5 13 3.0 3.0 1.2 0.6 0.8 10 3.0 2.5 2.5 0.6 1.0 5.0 3.0 1.6 1.0 0.6 0.6 26 11 14 7.0 540 90 75 1.0 10 0.5 0.5 0.4 Unit V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA A A A A A A A
A A
VCC=2.5V
Frequency/4 mode
VCC=5.0V
VCC=2.5V
Frequency/8 mode
VCC=5.0V
VCC=2.5V
Low-speed mode
VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V
On-chip oscillator mode f(XIN), f(XCIN) = stop All oscillations stopped (in STP state) Current increased at A/D converter operating
f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=2MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=stop in WIT state f(XIN)=stop in WIT state VCC=5.0V VCC=2.5V VCC=2.5V (in WIT state) Ta=25C Ta=85C f(XIN)=12.5 MHz, VCC=5 V in frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode f(XIN)= stop, VCC = 5 V in on-chip oscillator operating f(XIN) = stop, VCC = 5 V in low-speed mode
mA mA mA
A/D Converter Characteristics Table 27 A/D converter recommended operating condition (Vcc = 2.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VCC VIH VIL f(AD) Parameter Power source voltage "H" input voltage ADKEY "L" input voltage ADKEY AD converter clock frequency (1) (Low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode excluded) 4.5V < VCC 5.5V 4.0V < VCC 4.5V 2.0V < VCC 4.0V Test conditions Min. 2.0 0.9VCC 0 Limits Typ. 5.0 Max. 5.5 VCC 0.7 x VCC-0.5 6.25 4.0 VCC Unit V V V MHz MHz MHz
NOTE:
1. Confirm the recommended operating condition for main clock input frequency.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 99 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
Table 28 A/D converter characteristics (Vcc = 2.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode included, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
-
Parameter
Test conditions
Min.
Limits Typ.
Resolution Absolute accuracy 10bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 6.25MHz (quantification error mode excluded) 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 4MHz 2.2V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 8bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 6.25MHz mode 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 4MHz 2.2V < VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 2.2V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8 (6Vcc-11)MHz 2.0V VCC 2.2V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/8 VccMHz 2.0V VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 tCONV Conversion time(1) 10bitAD mode 8bitAD mode RLADDER Ladder resistor IVREF Reference input VREF=5.0V current Analog input current IIA ABS
Max. 10 4
Unit Bits LSB
2
tc(AD)x61 tc(AD)x49 12 50
35 150
tc(AD)x62 tc(AD)x50 100 200 5.0
s
k A
A
NOTES:
1. tc(AD): one cycle of AD conversion clock. AD conversion clock can be selected from SOURCE/2 or SOURCE/8. SOURCE represents the XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode and internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode or the low-speed mode. When the A/D conversion is executed in the frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 mode, or frequency/8 mode, set f(XIN) 500 kHz.
Relationship among AD conversion clock frequency, power source voltage, AD conversion mode and absolute accuracy.
AD conversion clock *Low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode: f(OCO)/8 or f(OCO)/32
10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB [MHz] 6.25
AD conversion clock frequency
4.0
f(XIN)/8 8bitAD=2LSB
2.2 2.0
AD conversion clock *frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 and frequency/8 mode: f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB
f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 8bitAD=2LSB 1.0 (Note) 0 1.8 2.0 2.2
4.0 4.5
5.5 [V]
Power source voltage VCC Note: f(XIN) 500kHz
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 100 of 131
38D2 Group
LCD power supply characteristics
QzROM VERSION
Table 29 LCD power supply characteristics (when connecting division resistors for LCD power supply) (VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol RLCD Parameter Division resister for LCD power supply (1) RSEL="10" RSEL="11" LCD drive timing A Test conditions Min. Limits Typ. 200 5 120 90 150 120 170 150 190 170 150 120 170 150 190 170 190 190 Max. Unit k
LCD drive timing B
LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00"
NOTE:
1. The value is the average of each one division resistor.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 101 of 131
38D2 Group
Timing Requirements and Switching Characteristics
QzROM VERSION
Table 30 Timing requirements (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width Min. 2 62.5 125 25 50 25 50 250 105 105 80 80 800 370 370 220 100 Limits Typ. Max. Unit
s ns
4.5V VCC 5.5V (1) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 4.5V VCC 5.5V 4.0V VCC < 4.5V
(2)
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (3) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (3) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time
(3)
NOTES:
1. 80 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 2. 32 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 3. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART).
Table 31 Timing requirements (2) (VCC = 1.8 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Min. 2 125 166 50 70 50 70 1000/VCC 1000/(5 x VCC-8) tc(CNTR)/2-20 tc(CNTR)/2-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200
(1)
Limits Typ.
Max.
Unit
s ns
2.0V VCC 4.0V
VCC < 2.0V 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V Main clock input "L" pulse width 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time 2.0V VCC 4.0V VCC < 2.0V
Main clock input "H" pulse width
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time
NOTE:
1. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F are "0" (UART).
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 102 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
Table 32 Switching characteristics (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) td(SCLK-TxD) tv(SCLK-TxD) tr(SCLK) tf(SCLK) Parameter Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time
-30
Min. tc(SCLK)/2-30 tc(SCLK)/2-30
Limits Typ
Max.
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
140 30 30
NOTE:
1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [001F16]) of UART control register is "0".
Table 33 Switching characteristics (2) (VCC = 1.8 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) td(SCLK-TxD) tv(SCLK-TxD) tr(SCLK) tf(SCLK) Parameter Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time
(1)
Min. tc(SCLK)/2-80 tc(SCLK)/2-80 -30
Limits Typ
Max.
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
350 80 80
NOTE:
1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [001F16]) of UART control register is "0".
1k Measurement output pin 100pF Measurement output pin 100pF
CMOS output
N-channel open-drain output (Note) Note: When bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16 [address 0FF116]) is "1." (N-channel open-drain output mode)
Fig 94. Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 103 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM VERSION
tC(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1
tWH(CNTR) 0.8VCC
tWL(CNTR) 0.2VCC
tWH(INT)
tWL(INT) 0.2VCC
INT0-INT2
0.8VCC
tW(RESET)
RESET
0.2VCC
0.8VCC
tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) 0.2VCC
XIN
0.8VCC
tC(SCLK)
SCLK1 SCLK2
tf 0.2VCC
tWL(SCLK)
tr 0.8VCC
tWH(SCLK)
tsu(RXD-SCLK)
th(SCLK-RXD)
RXD1 RXD2
td(SCLK-TXD)
0.8VCC 0.2VCC tV(SCLK-TXD)
TXD1 TXD2
Fig 95. Timing diagram
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 104 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 34 Absolute maximum ratings
Symbol VCC VI Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 Input voltage Input voltage Input voltage Input voltage VL1 VL2 VL3 RESET, XIN, CNVSS At output port At segment output All voltages are based on VSS. When an input voltage is measured, output transistors are cut off. Conditions Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 Unit V V
VI VI VI VI VO
-0.3 to VL2
V V V V V V V V V mW C C
VL1 to VL3 VL2 to 6.5
-0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VL3+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3 -0.3 to VCC+0.3
Output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 Output voltage COM0-COM3
VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg
Output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 Output voltage XOUT Ta=25C
- -
Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature
300 -20 to 85 -40 to 125
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 105 of 131
38D2 Group
Recommended Operating Conditions
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 35 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VCC Power source voltage(1) Parameter Frequency/2 mode (2) f(XIN) 12.5MHz f(XIN) 8MHz f(XIN) 4MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8MHz f(XIN) 16MHz f(XIN) 8MHz Low-speed mode On-chip oscillator mode VSS VL3 VREF AVSS VIA VIH VIH VIH VIH VIL VIL VIL VIL Power source voltage LCD power source voltage A/D converter reference voltage Analog power source voltage Analog input voltage AN0-AN7 "H" input voltage P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54- P57, P60, P61 RESET XIN P04-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30, P32, P35, P36, P40-P47, P52, P53, P62 P00-P03, P31, P33, P34, P37, P50, P51, P54- P57, P60, P61, CNVSS RESET XIN Min. 4.5 4.0 2.7 4.5 2.7 4.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 0 2.5 2.7 0 AVSS 0.7VCC 0.8VCC 0.8VCC 0.8VCC 0 0 0 0 VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC 0.3VCC 0.2VCC 0.2VCC 0.2VCC 5.5 VCC Limits Typ. Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
Frequency/4 mode Frequency/8 mode
NOTES:
1. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 2. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 106 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 36 Recommended operating conditions (3) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol
IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg)
Parameter "H" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 "H" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" total peak output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" total peak output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" total peak output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37 "H" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" total average output current (1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" total average output current (1) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P61 "L" total average output current (1) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P62-P62 "L" peak output current (2) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" peak output current (2) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" peak output current (2) P30-P37, P52, P53 "H" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" average output current (3) P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 "L" average output current (3) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" average output current (3) P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60-P62 "L" average output current (3) P30-P37, P52, P53
Min.
Limits Typ.
Max. -40
-40
Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA
40 40 110
-20 -20
20 20 90
-2.0 -5.0
IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) NOTES:
5.0 10 30
-1.0 -2.5
2.5 5.0 15
1. The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2. The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3. The average output current is average value measured over 100 ms.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 107 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 37 Recommended operating conditions (4) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1) Parameter Timer X and Timer Y Input frequency (duty cycle 50%) Conditions 4.5V VCC 5.5V 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 2.7V VCC < 4.0V f(Tclk) Timer X, Timer Y, Timer 1, Timer 2, 4.5V VCC 5.5V Timer 3, Timer 4 clock input frequency 4.0V VCC < 4.5V (Count source frequency of each timer) 2.7V VCC < 4.0V System clock frequency (1) 4.5V VCC 5.5V 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 2.7V VCC < 4.0V f(XIN) f(XCIN) Main clock input frequency (duty cycle 50%) (2)(3) Sub-clock oscillation frequency 4.5V VCC 5.5V 2.7V VCC < 4.5V (duty cycle 50%)
(4)(5)
Limits Min. Typ. Max. 6.25 2xVcc-4 Vcc 16 4xVcc-8 2xVcc 6.25 4 Vcc 1.0 1.0 32.768 16 8.0 80
Unit MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz kHz
f()
NOTES:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Relationship between system clock frequency and power source voltage is shown in the graph below. When the A/D converter is used, refer to the recommended operating conditions of the A/D converter. 12.5 MHz < f(XIN) 16 MHz is not available in the frequency/2 mode. The oscillation start voltage and the oscillation start time differ depending on factors such as the oscillator, circuit constants, and operating temperature range. Note that oscillation start may be particularly difficult at low voltage when using a high-frequency oscillator. 5. When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, set the clock input oscillation frequency on condition that f(XCIN) < f(XIN)/3.


[MHz] 6.25
[MHz] 16
System clock frequency
4.0
Main clock XIN frequency
8.0
2.7
1.0
0
2.7
4.0 Power source voltage
4.5
5.5 [V]
0 2.7 4.5 Power source voltage 5.5 [V]
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 108 of 131
38D2 Group
Electrical Characteristics
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 38
Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter "H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "H" output voltage P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60- P62(1) "L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 "L" output voltage P40-P47, P50, P51, P54-P57, P60- P62(1) "L" output voltage P30-P37, P52, P53 Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT2, KW0- KW7 Hysteresis RxD1, RxD2, SCLK1, SCLK2 Hysteresis RESET VI=VCC "H" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 Test conditions IOH= -2.5mA IOH= -5mA IOH= -1.25mA IOL=5mA IOL=1.25mA IOL=10mA IOL=2.5mA IOL=15mA 0.5 Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 2.0 0.5 2.0 0.5 2.0 Limits Typ. Max. Unit V V V V V
Symbol VOH VOH
VOL VOL
VOL VT+-VT-
V V
VT+-VT- VT+-VT- IIH IIH IIH IIH IIL
0.5 0.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0
-5.0 -60 -25 -120 -50 -240 -100 -5.0 -30 -6.5 -70 -25 -140 -45 -5.0 -4.0
V V
A A A A A A A A A A A A
VI=VCC "H" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P62 VI=VCC "H" input current RESET, CNVSS "H" input current XIN "L" input current P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 VI=VCC VI=VSS Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS "L" input current P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60-P67 Pull-up "OFF" VCC=5.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VCC=3.0V, VI=VSS Pull-up "ON" VI=VSS "L" input current RESET, CNVSS "L" input current XIN VI=VSS VCC=5V, Ta=25C 2500 On-chip oscillator frequency
IIL
IIL IIL f(OCO)
5000
7500
kHz
NOTE:
1. When the port Xc switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register is "1", the drivability of P62 is different from the above.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 109 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 39 Electrical characteristics (2) (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz, output transistors in the cut-off state, A/D converter stopped, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VRAM ICC Parameter RAM hold voltage Power source current Test conditions When clock is stopped Frequency/2 mode Vcc=5.0V Min. 2.2 Limits Typ. 4.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 3.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0 400 4.0 300 3.7 600 500 500 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.8 Max. 5.5 7.0 3.5 3.5 3 2.5 2.5 5.6 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.5 2.5 5 3 3 3 2.5 2.5 800 10 20 600 9 18 1200 1000 1000 3.0 Unit V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA A
A A A A A A A A mA
Vcc=2.7V
Frequency/4 mode Vcc=5.0V
Vcc=2.7V
Frequency/8 mode Vcc=5.0V
Vcc=2.7V
Low-speed mode
Vcc=5.0V
f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=4MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=2MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz f(XIN)=12.5MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=8MHz f(XIN)=8MHz (in WIT state) f(XIN)=4MHz f(XIN)=stop in WIT state Ta=25C Ta=85C f(XIN)=stop in WIT state
Vcc=2.7V
Ta=25C Ta=85C
On-chip oscillator mode f(XIN), f(XCIN): stop All oscillations are stopped (in STP state) Current increased at A/D converter operating
Vcc=5.0V Vcc=2.7V Vcc=2.7V (in WIT state) Ta=25C Ta=85C f(XIN)=12.5MHz, VCC=5V in frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode f(XIN)=stop, VCC=5V in on-chip oscillator operating f(XIN)=stop, VCC=5V in low-speed mode
mA mA
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 40 A/D converter recommended operating condition (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol VCC VIH VIL f(AD) Parameter Power source voltage "H" input voltage ADKEY "L" input voltage ADKEY AD converter clock frequency (1) (Low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode excluded) 4.5V < VCC 5.5V 4.0V < VCC 4.5V 2.7V < VCC 4.0V Test conditions Limits Min. 2.7 0.9VCC 0 Typ. 5.0 Max. 5.5 VCC 0.7 x VCC - 0.5 6.25 4.0 VCC Unit V V V MHz MHz MHz
NOTE:
1. Confirm the recommended operating condition for main clock input frequency.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 110 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 41 A/D converter characteristics (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, output transistors in cut-off state, low-speed * on-chip oscillator mode included, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
-
Parameter
Test conditions
Min.
Limits Typ.
ABS
Resolution Absolute accuracy 10bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/86.25MHz (quantification error mode excluded) 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/84MHz 2.7V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8VccMHz 2.7V VCC 5.5V, f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 8bitAD 4.5V < VCC 5.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/86.25MHz mode 4.0V < VCC 4.5V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/84MHz 2.7V VCC 4.0V, AD conversion clock=f(XIN)/2, f(XIN)/8VccMHz 2.7V VCC 5.5V, f(OCO)/8, f(OCO)/32 tCONV Conversion time(1) 10bitAD mode 8bitAD mode RLADDER Ladder resistor IVREF Reference input VREF=5V current IIA Analog input current
Max. 10 4
Unit Bits LSB
2
tc(AD) x 61 tc(AD) x 49 12 50
35 150
tc(AD) x 62 tc(AD) x 50 100 200 5.0
s
k A
A
NOTES:
1. tc(AD): one cycle of AD conversion clock. AD conversion clock can be selected from SOURCE/2 or SOURCE/8. SOURCE represents the XIN input in the frequency/2, 4 or 8 mode and internal on-chip oscillator divided by 4 in the on-chip oscillator mode or the low-speed mode. When the A/D conversion is executed in the frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 mode, or frequency/8 mode, set f(XIN) 500 kHz.
Relationship among AD conversion clock frequency, power source voltage, AD conversion mode and absolute accuracy.
AD conversion clock * Low-speed mode and on-chip oscillator mode: f(OCO)/8 or f(OCO)/32
10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB [MHz] 6.25
AD conversion clock frequency
4.0
2.7 f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8 10bitAD=4LSB 8bitAD=2LSB
AD conversion clock * frequency/2 mode, frequency/4 and frequency/8 mode: f(XIN)/2 or f(XIN)/8
(Note) 0 2.7 4.0 4.5 Power source voltage VCC 5.5 [V]
Note: f(XIN) 500kHz
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 111 of 131
38D2 Group
LCD power supply characteristics
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 42 LCD power supply characteristics (when connecting division resistors for LCD power supply) (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol RLCD Parameter Division resister for LCD power supply (1) RSEL="10" RSEL="11" LCD drive timing A Test conditions Min. Limits Typ. 200 5 120 90 150 120 170 150 190 170 150 120 170 150 190 170 190 190 Max. Unit k
LCD drive timing B
LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 1 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 2 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 4 RSEL="00" LCD circuit division ratio = RSEL="01" divided by 8 RSEL="00"
NOTE:
1. The value is the average of each one division resistor.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 112 of 131
38D2 Group
Timing Requirements And Switching Characteristics
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 43 Power supply circuit characteristics (Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol td(P-R) Parameter Internal power source voltage stabilizes time at power-on Test conditions 2.7 VCC 5.5V Min. 2 Limits Typ. Max. Unit ms
Table 44 Timing requirements (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RxD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RxD) Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width Parameter Min. 2 62.5 125 25 50 25 50 250 105 105 80 80 800 370 370 220 100 Limits Typ. Max. Unit
s ns
4.5V VCC 5.5V (1) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V 4.5V VCC 5.5V (2) 4.0V VCC < 4.5V
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time (3) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width (3) Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width (3) Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time
NOTES:
1. 80 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 2. 32 ns in the frequency/2 mode. 3. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART).
Table 45 Timing requirements (2) (VCC = 2.7 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tW(RESET) tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) tWH(INT) tWL(INT) tC(SCLK) tWH(SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tsu(RXD-SCLK) th(SCLK-RXD) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "H" pulse width INT0-INT2 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 input setup time Serial I/O1, 2 input hold time Limits Min. Typ. 2 125 50 50 1000/VCC tc(CNTR)/2-20 tc(CNTR)/2-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200 Max. Unit
s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
NOTE:
1. When bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when bit 6 of address 001A16, 001F16 are "0" (UART).
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 113 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
Table 46 Switching characteristics (1) (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tWH (SCLK) tWL (SCLK) td (SCLK-TXD) tV (SCLK-TXD) tr (SCLK) tf (SCLK) Parameter Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time
-30
Min. tC(SCLK)/2-30 tC(SCLK)/2-30
Limits Typ
Max.
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
140 30 30
NOTE:
1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [0FF116]) of UART control register is "0".
Table 47 Switching characteristics (2) (VCC = 2.7 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol tWH (SCLK) tWL (SCLK) td (SCLK-TXD) tV (SCLK-TXD) tr (SCLK) tf (SCLK) Parameter Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1, 2 output delay time (1) Serial I/O1, 2 output valid time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output rising time Serial I/O1, 2 clock output falling time
(1)
Limits Min. tC(SCLK)/2-80 tC(SCLK)/2-80
-30
Typ
Max.
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
350 80 80
NOTE:
1. The P55/TxD1 [P32/TxD2] P-channel output disable bit (bit 4 of address 001B16 [0FF116]) of UART control register is "0".
1k Measurement output pin 100pF CMOS output Measurement output pin 100pF N-channel open-drain output (Note) Note: When bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16 [address 0FF116]) is "1." (N-channel open-drain output mode)
Fig 96. Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 114 of 131
38D2 Group
FLASH MEMORY VERSION
tc(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) CNTR0, CNTR1 0.8VCC 0.2VCC tWL(CNTR)
tWH(INT) INT0-INT2 0.8VCC 0.2VCC
tWL(INT)
tw(RESET) RESET 0.2VCC 0.8VCC
tc(XIN) tWH(XIN) 0.8VCC XIN 0.2VCC tWL(XIN)
tC(SCLK) tf SCLK1 SCLK2 0.2VCC tsu(RXD-SCLK) tWL(SCLK) tr 0.8VCC tWH(SCLK)
th(SCLK-RXD)
RXD1 RXD2 td(SCLK-TXD) TXD1 TXD2
0.8VCC 0.2VCC tV(SCLK-TXD)
Fig 97. Timing diagram (in single-chip mode)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 115 of 131
38D2 Group
PACKAGE OUTLINE Diagrams showing the latest package dimensions and mounting information are available in the "Packages" section of the Renesas Technology website.
JEITA Package Code P-LQFP64-14x14-0.80 RENESAS Code PLQP0064GA-A Previous Code 64P6U-A MASS[Typ.] 0.7g
HD *1 D
48
33 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. 2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.
49
32 bp b1
c1 HE E
c
Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol
*2
Terminal cross section
64 17
1 ZD Index mark
16
F
L L1
D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1
y e *3 bp x
Detail F
Min Nom Max 13.9 14.0 14.1 13.9 14.0 14.1 1.4 15.8 16.0 16.2 15.8 16.0 16.2 1.7 0.1 0.2 0 0.32 0.37 0.42 0.35 0.09 0.145 0.20 0.125 8 0 0.8 0.20 0.10 1.0 1.0 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0
ZE
A
A2
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 116 of 131
A1
c
38D2 Group
JEITA Package Code P-LQFP64-10x10-0.50
RENESAS Code PLQP0064KB-A
Previous Code 64P6Q-A / FP-64K / FP-64KV
MASS[Typ.] 0.3g
HD *1 48 D 33 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. 2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. bp b1
49
32
HE
E
Reference Dimension in Millimeters Symbol
*2
c1
c
64
1 Index mark ZD
16
ZE
17
Terminal cross section
F
D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1
e
*3
A1
y
bp
L L1 Detail F
x
Min Nom Max 9.9 10.0 10.1 9.9 10.0 10.1 1.4 11.8 12.0 12.2 11.8 12.0 12.2 1.7 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.18 0.09 0.145 0.20 0.125 8 0 0.5 0.08 0.08 1.25 1.25 0.35 0.5 0.65 1.0
A2
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 117 of 131
A
c
38D2 Group
APPENDIX Note on Programming 1. Processor Status Register (1) Initialization of the processor status register It is required to initialize the processor status register (PS) flags which affect program execution. It is particularly essential to initialize the T and D flags because of their effect on calculations. Initialize these flags at the beginning of the program. At a reset, the contents of the processor status register (PS) are undefined except for the I flag which is "1". 2. Decimal Calculations (1) Instructions for decimal calculations To perform decimal calculations, set the decimal mode (D) flag to "1" with the SED instruction and execute the ADC or SBC instruction. In that case, after the ADC or SBC instruction, execute another instruction before the SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction.
Set the decimal mode (D) flag to "1"
Execute the ADC or SBC instruction
Reset
NOP
Initialize the flags
Execute the SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction
Main program
Fig. 100 Instructions for decimal calculations
(2) Status flag at decimal calculations When the ADC or SBC instruction is executed in decimal mode (D flag = "1"), three of the status flags (N, V, and Z) are disabled. The carry (C) flag is set to "1" if a carry is generated and is cleared to "0" if a borrow is generated as a result of a calculation, so it can be used to determine whether the calculation has generated a carry or borrow. Initialize the C flag before each calculation.
Fig. 98 Initialization of processor status register flags
(2) How to refer the processor status register To refer the contents of the processor status register (PS), execute the PHP instruction once and then read the contents of (S+1). If necessary, execute the PLP instruction to return the stored PS to its original status.
(S) (S) + 1 Stored PS
Fig. 99 Stack memory contents after PHP instruction execution
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 118 of 131
38D2 Group
3. JMP Instruction When using the JMP instruction (indirect addressing mode), do not specify the address where "FF16" is allocated to the loworder 8 bits as the operand. 4. Multiplication and Division Instructions (1) The MUL and DIV instructions are not affected by the T and D flags. (2) Executing these instructions does not change the contents of the processor status register. 5. Read-Modify-Write Instruction Do not execute any read-modify-write instruction to the read invalid (address) SFR. The read-modify-write instruction reads 1-byte of data from memory, modifies the data, and writes 1-byte the data to the original memory. In the 740 Family, the read-modify-write instructions are the following: (1) Bit handling instructions: CLB, SEB (2) Shift and rotate instructions: ASL, LSR, ROL, ROR, RRF (3) Add and subtract instructions: DEC, INC (4) Logical operation instructions (1's complement): COM Although not the read-modify-write instructions, add and subtract/logical operation instructions (ADC, SBC, AND, EOR, and ORA) when T flag = "1" operate in the way as the readmodify-write instruction. Do not execute them to the read invalid SFR. When the read-modify-write instruction is executed to the read invalid SFR, the following may result: As reading is invalid, the read value is undefined. The instruction modifies this undefined value and writes it back, so the written value will be indeterminate. Notes on Peripheral Functions Notes on I/O Ports 1. Use in Stand-By State When using the MCU in stand-by state* 1 for low-power consumption, do not leave the input level of an I/O port undefined. Be especially careful to the I/O ports for the Nchannel open-drain. In this case, pull-up (connect to Vcc) or pull-down (connect to Vss) these ports through a resistor. When determining a resistance value, note the following: * External circuit * Variation in the output level during ordinary operation When using a built-in pull-up resistor, note variations in current values: * When setting as an input port: Fix the input level * When setting as an output port: Prevent current from flowing out externally. Even if a port is set to output by the direction register, when the content of the port latch is "1", the transistor becomes the OFF state, which allows the port to be in the high-impedance state. This may cause the level to be undefined depending on external circuits. As described above, if the input level of an I/O port is left undefined, the power source current may flow because the potential applied to the input buffer in the MCU will be unstable. *1 Stand-by state: Stop mode by executing the STP instruction Wait mode by executing the WIT instruction 2. Modifying Output Data with Bit Handling Instruction When the port latch of an I/O port is modified with the bit handling instruction* 1 , the value of an unspecified bit may change. I/O ports can be set to input mode or output mode in byte units. When the port register is read or written, the following will be operated: * Port as input mode Read: Read the pin level Write: Write to the port latch * Port as output mode Read: Read the port latch or peripheral function output (specifications vary depending on the port) Write: Write to the port latch (output the content of the port latch from the pin) Meanwhile, the bit handling instructions are the read-modifywrite instructions*2. Executing the bit handling instruction to the port register allows reading and writing a bit unspecified with the instruction at the same time. If an unspecified bit is set to input mode, the pin level is read and the value is written to the port latch. At this time, if the original content of the port latch and the pin level do not match, the content of the port latch changes. If an unspecified bit is set to output mode, the port latch is normally read, but the peripheral function output is read in some ports and the value is written to the port latch. At this time, if the original content of the port latch and the peripheral function output do not match, the content of the port latch changes. *1 Bit handling instructions: CLB, SEB *2 Read-modify-write instruction: Reads 1-byte of data from memory, modifies the data, and writes 1-byte of the data to the original memory.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 119 of 131
38D2 Group
3. Direction Registers The values of the port direction registers cannot be read. This means, it is impossible to use the LDA instruction, memory operation instruction when the T flag is "1", addressing mode using direction register values as qualifiers, and bit test instructions such as BBC and BBS. It is also impossible to use bit operation instructions such as CLB and SEB, and read-modifywrite instructions to direction registers, including calculations such as ROR. To set the direction registers, use instructions such as LDM or STA. 4. Pull-Up Control Only for the pin set to input mode, pull-up is controlled by the PULL register and the segment output disable register. Notes on Termination of Unused Pins 1. Termination of Unused Pins Perform the following at the shortest possible distance (20 mm or less) from the MCU pins. (1) I/O ports Set the ports to input mode and connect each pin to VCC or VSS through a resistor of 1 k to 10 k. An internal pull-up resistor can also be used for the port where the internal pull-up resister is selectable. To set the ports to output mode, leave open at "L" or "H" output. * When setting the ports to output mode and leave open, input mode in the initial state remains until the mode of the ports are switched to output mode by a program after a reset. This may cause the voltage level of the pins to be undefined and the power source current to increase while the ports remains in input mode. For any effects on the system, careful system evaluations should be implemented on the user side. * The direction registers may be changed due to a program runaway or noise, so reset the registers periodically by a program to increase the program reliability. 2. Termination Concerns (1) When setting I/O ports to input mode [1] Do not leave open * The power source current may increase depending on the first-stage circuit. * The ports are more likely affected by noise when compared with the termination shown on the above "1. (1) I/O ports" [2] Do not connect to VCC or VSS directly If the direction registers are changed to output mode due to a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur. [3] Do not connect multiple ports in a lump to VCC or VSS through a resistor. If the direction registers are changed to output mode due to a program runaway or noise, a short circuit may occur between the ports.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 120 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on Interrupts 1. Changing Related Register Settings If the interrupt occurrence synchronized with the following settings is not required, take the sequence shown below. * When selecting the external interrupt active edge * When selecting the interrupt source of the interrupt vector address where two or more interrupt sources are allocated 2. Checking Interrupt Request Bit To check the interrupt request bit with the BBC or BBS instruction immediately after this bit is set to "0", take the following sequence. If the BBC or BBS instruction is executed immediately after the interrupt request bit is set to "0", the bit value before being set to "0" is read.
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "0" (disabled).
Set the interrupt request bit to "0" (no interrupt)
Set the interrupt edge selection bit (active edge switch bit) or interrupt (source) selection bit.
NOP (one or more instructions)
Execute the BBC or BBS instruction NOP (one or more instructions)
Fig. 102 Sequence for setting interrupt request bit
Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to "0" (no interrupt request).
3. Setting Unused Interrupts Set the interrupt enable bit of the unused interrupt to "0" (disabled).
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled).
Fig. 101 Sequence for setting related register
In the following cases, the interrupt request bit of the corresponding interrupt may be set to "1". * INT0 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 0 of interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16)) * INT1 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 1 of interrupt edge selection register) * INT2 interrupt edge selection bit (bit 2 of interrupt edge selection register) * CNTR0 active edge switch bits (bits 6 and 7 of timer X control register 1 (address 002E16)) * CNTR1 active edge switch bit (bits 6 of timer Y mode register (address 003816)) * INT2/Key input interrupt switch bit (bit 3 of interrupt edge selection register) * Timer Y/CNTR1 interrupt switch bit (bit 4 of interrupt edge selection register)
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 121 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on Timers 1. Frequency Divider All timers shares one circuit for the frequency divider to generate the count source. Thus the frequency divider is not initialized when each individual timer is activated. When the frequency divider is selected as the count source, a one-cycle delay of the maximum count source will result between when the timer is activated and when it starts counting or outputs the waveform. The count source cannot be observed externally. 2. Division Ratio for Timer 1 to 4 The division ratio is 1/(n+1) when the value n (0 to 255) is written to the timer latch. 3. Switching Frequency and Count Source for Timer 1 to 4, X, and Y Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 4. Setting Timer 1 and 2 When STP Instruction Executed Before executing the STP instruction, first set the wait time at return. 5. Setting Order to Timer 1 to 4 When switching the count source of timer 1 to timer 4, a narrow pulse may be generated at the count input, which causes the timer count value to be undefined. Also, if the timers are used in cascade connection, a narrow pulse may be generated at the output when writing to the pervious timer, which causes the next timer count value to be undefined. Thus set the value from timer 1 in order after setting the count source of timer 1 to timer 4. 6. Write to Timer 2, 3, and 4 When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the reload latch. 7. Timer 3 PWM0 Mode, Timer 4 PWM1 Mode (1) When PWM output is suspended once it starts, the time to resume outputting may be delayed one section (256 x ts) of the short interval depending on the level of the output pulse at that time: Stop at "H": No output delay Stop at "L": Output is delayed time of 256 x ts (2) When PWM mode is used, the interrupt requests and values of timer 3 and timer 4 are updated every cycle of the long interval (4 x 256 x ts). 8. Write Order to Timer X (1) When timer mode, pulse output mode, event counter mode, or pulse width measurement mode is set, write to the following registers in the order below: The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (low-order) The timer X register (high-order) Writing to only one of these registers cannot be performed. When either of the above modes is set and timer X operates as a 16-bit counter, if the timer X register (extension) is never set after a reset release, setting the timer X register (extension) is not required. In that case, write the timer X register (low-order) first and the timer X register (high-order) next. However, once the timer X register (extension) is written, note that the value is retained in the reload latch. (2) Write to the timer X register by the 16-bit unit. Do not read the timer X register while write operation is performed. If the write operation is not completed, normal operation will not be performed. (3) When IGBT output mode or PWM mode is set, do not write "1" to the timer X register (extension). If "1" has been already written to the timer X register, be sure to write "0" to the register before use. Write to the following registers in the order below: The compare registers 1, 2, 3 (high- and low-order) The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (low-order) The timer X register (high-order) The compare registers (high- and low-order) can be written in either order. However, be sure to write both the compare registers 1, 2, 3 and the timer X register at the same time. 9. Read Order to Timer X (1) In all modes, read the following registers in the order below: The timer X register (extension) The timer X register (high-order) The timer X register (low-order) When reading the timer X register (extension) is not required, read the timer X register (high-order) first and the timer X register (low-order) next. The read order to the compare registers 1, 2, 3 is not specified. (2) Read the timer X register in 16-bit units. Do not write to it during read operation. If read operation is terminated in progress, normal operation will not be performed.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 122 of 131
38D2 Group
10. Write to Timer X (1) Timer X can select either writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only by the timer X write control bit (b3) in the timer X mode register (address 002D16). When writing to the latch only, if a value is written to the timer X address, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After a reset release, if a value is written to the timer X address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written simultaneously. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the high-order reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the high-order reload latch. (2) Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 11. Setting Timer X Mode Register When PWM mode or IGBT output mode is set, be sure to set the write control bit in the timer X mode register to "1" (writing to latch only). After writing to the timer X register (high-order), the contents of both registers are simultaneously reflected in the output waveform at the next underflow. 12. Timer X Output Control Functions To use the output control functions (INT1 and INT2), set the levels of INT1 and INT2 to "H" for the falling edge active or to "L" for the rising edge active before switching to IGBT output mode. 13. CNTR0 Active Edge Selection (1) Setting the CNTR0 active edge switch bits also affects the interrupt active edge at the same time. (2) When the pulse width is measured, set bit 7 of the CNTR0 active edge switch bits to "0". 14. When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used When timer X pulse mode measurement mode is used, enable the event counter wind control data (bit 5 of timer X mode register (address 002D16)) by setting to "0". If the event counter window control data (bit 5 of timer X mode r egister (address 002 D16)) is set to "1 " (disabled) to enable/disable the CNTR0 input, the input is not accepted after the timer 1 underflow. 15. CNTR1 Active Edge Selection Setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bits also affects the interrupt active edge at the same time. However, in pulse width HL continuous HL measurement mode, the CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of the pin regardless of the settings of the CNTR1 active edge switch bits. 16. Read from/Write to Timer Y (1) When reading from/writing to timer Y, read from/write to both the high-order and low-order bytes of timer Y. To read the value, read the high-order bytes first and the low-order bytes next. To write the value, write the low-order bytes first and the high-order bytes next. Writing/reading should be preformed in 16-bit units. If write/read operation is changed in progress, normal operation will not be performed. (2) Timer Y can select either writing data to both the latch and the timer at the same time or writing data only by the timer Y write control bit (b0) in the timer Y control register (address 003916). When writing to the latch only, if a value is written to the timer Y address, the value is set into the reload latch and the timer is updated at the next underflow. After a reset release, if a value is written to the timer Y address, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time, because they are written simultaneously. When writing to the latch only, if the write timing to the high-order reload latch and the underflow timing are almost the same, the value is set into the timer and the timer latch at the same time. At this time, count is stopped during write operation to the high-order reload latch. (3) Switch the frequency division or count source* while the timer count is stopped. *This also applies when the frequency divider output is selected as the timer count source and the count source is switched in conjunction with a transition between operating modes (onchip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode). Be careful when changing settings in the CPU mode register. 17. Real time port control When switching the setting of the real time port control bits between valid and invalid, write to the timer Y mode register in byte units with the LDM or STA instruction so that both bits are switched at the same time. Also, before using this function, set the P46 and P47 port direction registers to output.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 123 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on Serial I/O1 Becaouse the operation of the serial I/O2 is as same as serial I/O1, the following notes are written about the serial I/O1. 1. Write to Baud Rate Generator Write to the baud rate generator while transmission/reception is stopped. 2. Setting Sequence When Serial I/O1 Transmit Interrupt Used To use the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, if the interrupt occurrence synchronized with settings is not required, take the following sequence: (1) Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit (bit 2 of interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16)) to "0" (disabled). (2) Set the transmit enable bit to "1". (3) After one or more instructions have been executed, set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit (bit 2 of interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16)) to "0" (no interrupt). (4) Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to "1" (enabled). When the transmit enable bit is set to "1", the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0 of serial I/O1 status register) and the transmit shift completion flag are set to "1". This allows an interrupt request to be generated regardless of which interrupt occurrence source has been selected by the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3 of serial I/O1 control register) and the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit is set to "1". 3. Data Transmission Control Using Transmit Shift Completion Flag After transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, the transmit shift completion flag (bit 2 of serial I/O1 status register (address 001916)) changes from "1" to "0" after a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the system clock. Thus, after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, note this delay when controlling data transmission by referencing the transmit shift completion flag. 4. Setting Serial I/O1 Control Register Before setting the serial I/O1 control register again, first set both the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "0" and initialize the transmission and reception circuits. 6. Serial I/O1 Enable Bit during Transmit Operation During transmission, if the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7 of serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16)) is set to "0", the pin function is set to an I/O port and the internal transmit operation continues even though transmit data is not output externally. Also, if the transmit buffer register is written in this state, transmit operation starts internally. If the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to "1" at this time, transmit data is output to the TxD pin from that point. 7. Transmission Control When External Clock Selected During data transmission, if the external clock is selected as the synchronous clock, set the transmit enable bit to "1" while SCLK1 is set to "H". Also, write to the transmit buffer register while SCLK1 is set to "H". 8. Receive Operation in Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode During reception in clock synchronous serial I/O mode, set both the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "1". Then write dummy data to the transmit buffer register. When the internal clock is selected as the synchronous clock, the synchronous clock is output at this point and receive operation starts. When the external clock is selected, reception is enabled at this point and inputting the external clock starts transmit operation. The P55/TXD1 [P32/TxD2] pin outputs dummy data written in the transmit buffer register. 9. Transmit/Receive Operation in Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode In clock synchronous serial I/O mode, set the transmit enable bit and the receive enable bit to "0" simultaneously to stop transmit/receive operations. If only one of the operations is stopped, transmission and reception cannot be synchronized, which will cause a bit error.
Set both the transmit enable bit (TE) and the receive enable bit (RE) to "0" Set bits 0 to 3, and 6 of the serial I/O1 control register. Set both the transmit enable bit (TE) and the receive enable bit (RE), or one of them to "1".
Settings can be made with the LDM instruction at the same time
Fig. 103 Sequence of setting serial I/O1 control register
5. Pin Status After Transmission Completed After transmission is completed, the TxD pin retains the level when transmission is completed. When the internal clock is selected in clock synchronous serial I/O mode, the SCLK1 pin is set to "H".
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 124 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on A/D Conversion 1. Analog Input Pin Set the signal source impedance for analog input low, or equip an analog input pin with an external capacitor of 0.01 F to 1 F. In addition, operations of application products should be verified thoroughly on the user side. An analog input pin has a built-in capacitor for analog voltage comparison. Thus if a signal from the high impedance signal source is input to the analog input pin, charge and discharge noise will be generated. This may cause the A/D conversion/comparison accuracy to drop. 2. Clock Frequency during A/D Conversion The comparator input consists of a capacity coupling. If the conversion rate is too low, the A/D conversion accuracy may deteriorate due to a charge lost, so set f(XIN) 500 kHz or more for A/D conversion in XIN mode. Also, do not execute the STP or WIT instruction during A/D conversion. In low-speed mode (when on-chip oscillator is selected), as A/D conversion is performed using the internal on-chip oscillator, there is no limit on the minimum frequency for f(XIN). 3. ADKEY Function When the ADKEY enable bit is set to "1", the analog input pin selection bits are disabled. Do not execute the A/D conversion by a program while ADKEY is enabled. Enabling ADKEY does not change bits 0 to 2 of ADCON. 4. A/D Conversion Immediately After ADKEY Function Started In the ADKEY function, A/D conversion is not performed to the analog input voltage immediately after starting the function. This causes the A/D conversion result immediately after starting the function to be undefined. If the A/D conversion result of the analog input voltage applied to the ADKEY pin is required, select the analog input pin corresponding to ADKEY before performing A/D conversion. 5. Input Voltage Applied to ADKEY Pin Set the input to the ADKEY pin into a steep falling waveform and stabilize the input voltage within eight cycles (1 s when f(XIN) = 8 MHz) from the moment the input voltage reaches VIL or lower. The actual threshold voltage for the ADKEY pin is between VIH and VIL. To prevent unnecessary ADKEY operation due to noise or other factors, set the ADKEY pin voltage to VIH (0.9 VCC) or more while the input is waited. 6. Register Operation during A/D Conversion The A/D conversion operation is not guaranteed if the following are preformed: * The CPU mode register is operated during A/D conversion operation * The AD control register is operated during A/D conversion operation * The STP or WIT instruction is executed during A/D conversion operation 7. A/D Converter Power Source Pin Connect to the A/D converter power source pin to AVSS or VSS whether the A/D conversion function is used or not. If the AVSS pin is left open, the MCU may operate incorrectly because the pin will be affected by noise or other factors.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 125 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on LCD Drive Control Circuit 1. Setting Data to LCD Display RAM To write data to the LCD display RAM when the LCD enable bit is set to "1" and while LCD is turned on, set fixed data. Rewriting with temporary data may cause LCD to flicker. The following shows a processing example to write data to the LCD display RAM while LCD is turned on.
(1) Ccorrect processing
*Content at address 004016: "FF16"
LCD on
LCD on or off?
Off
On
LCD on or off
Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "FF16"
Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "0016"
Set fixed data to LCD display RAM
(2) Incorrect processing
LCD on
*Content at address 004016: "FF16"
Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "0016"
Set off data to LCD display RAM
LCD off
LCD on or off?
Off
On
LCD on or off
Set LCD display RAM data LRAM0 (address 004016) "FF16"
Set fixed data to LCD display RAM
Fig. 104 Processing example when writing data to LCD display RAM While LCD Turned On
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 126 of 131
38D2 Group
2. Executing STP Instruction Execution of the STP instruction sets the LCD enable bit (bit 3 of the LCD mode register) and bits 0 to 5 and bit 7 of the LCD power control register to "0" and the LCD panel turns off. To make the LCD panel turn on after returning from the stop mode, set these bits to "1". 3. VL3 Pin To use the LCD drive control circuit while VL3 is set to the voltage equal to VCC, apply the VCC voltage to the VL3 pin and write "1" to the VL3 connection bit of LCD power control register (address 003816)). 4. LCD Drive Power Supply Power supply capacitor may be insufficient with the division resistance for LCD power supply, and the characteristic of the LCD panel. In this case, there is the method of connecting the bypass capacitor about 0.1-0.33F to VL1-VL3 pins. The example of a strengthening measure of the LCD drive power supply is shown below. 5. Using No ROM Correction Function If the ROM correction function is not used, the ROM correction vector can be used as normal RAM/ROM. When using as normal RAM/ROM, be sure to set bits 1 and 0 of the ROM correction enable register to "0" (disabled). Notes on Clock Generating Circuit 1. Oscillation Circuit Constants The oscillation circuit constants vary depending on the resonator. Use values recommended by the oscillator manufacturer. A feed-back resistor is implemented between the XIN and XOUT pins (an external feed-back resistor may be required depending on conditions). As no feed-back resistor is implemented between XCIN and XCOUT, add a feedback resistor of about 10 M. 2. Transition between Modes When the MCU transits between on-chip oscillator mode, XIN mode, or low-speed mode, both the XIN and XCIN oscillations must be stabilized. Be especially careful when turning the power on and returning from stop mode. Refer to the clock state transition diagram for a transition between each mode. Also, set the frequency in the condition that f(XIN) 3 x (XCIN). When XIN mode is not used (the XIN-XOUT oscillation or external clock input to XIN is not performed), connect XIN to VCC through a resistor. 3. Oscillation Stabilization Before executing the STP instruction, set the values * to generate the wait time required for oscillation stabilization to timer 1 latch and timer 2 latch (low-order 8 bits of timer 1 and high-order 8 bits of timer 2). *Referential values (Set values according to your oscillator and system) * OSCSEL = "L" in the flash memory and QzROM versions: ..................................................................... 000516 or more * OSCSEL = "H" in the QzROM version: .....................................................................01FF16 or more 4. Low-Speed Mode, XIN Mode To use low-speed mode or XIN mode, wait until oscillation stabilizes after enabling the XIN-XOUT and XCIN-XCOUT oscillation, then switch to the mode.
VL3
VL2
* Connect by the shortest possible wiring. * Connect the bypass capacitor to the VL1 -VL3 pins as short as possible. (Referential value:0.1-0.33 F)
VL1
Fig. 105 Strengthening measure example of LCD drive power supply
Notes on ROM Correction Function 1. Returning to Main Program To return to the main program from the correction program, use the JMP instruction (3-byte instruction). 2. Using ROM Correction Function If the ROM correction function is used, be sure to enable the ROM correction enable bit after setting the ROM correction register. 3. Address Do not set addresses other than the ROM area in the ROM correction address registers. Also, do not set the same address in the ROM correction address 1 register and the ROM correction address 2 register. 4. ROM Correction Process Include the ROM correction process in the program beforehand.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 127 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on Flash Memory Mode
* CPU Rewrite Mode
(1) Operating Speed During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock to 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). (2) Prohibited Instructions During CPU rewrite mode, the instructions which reference data in the flash memory cannot be used. (3) Interrupts During CPU rewrite mode, interrupts cannot be used because they reference data in the flash memory. (4) Watchdog Timer If the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset by underflow will not occur because the watchdog timer is continuously cleared during program or erase operation. (5) Reset Reset is always valid. If CNVSS = "H" when a reset is released, boot mode is active. The program starts from the address stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. Notes on Watchdog Timer 1. Watchdog Timer Underflow The watchdog timer does not operate in stop mode, but it continues counting during the wait time to release the stop state and in wait mode. Write to the watchdog timer control register so that the watchdog timer will not underflow during these periods. 2. Stopping On-Chip Oscillator Oscillation When the on-chip oscillator is selected by the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2, the on-chip oscillator forcibly oscillates and it cannot be stopped. Also, in this time, set the STP instruction function selection bit to "1" at this time. Select "0" (SOURCE) for the watchdog timer count source selection bit 2 at the system which on-chip oscillator is stopped. 3. Watchdog Timer Control Register Bits 7 to 5 can be rewritten only once after a reset. After writing, rewriting is disabled because they are locked. These bits are set to "0" after a reset.
Notes on Differences between QzROM Version and Flash Memory Version The flash memory and QzROM versions differ in their manufacturing processes, built-in ROM, memory size, and layout patterns. Because of these differences, characteristic values, operation margins, noise immunity, and noise radiation and oscillation circuit constants may vary within the specified range of electrical characteristics. When switching to the QzROM version, implement system evaluations equivalent to those performed in the flash memory version. Confirm page 11 about the differences of functions. Notes on Power Source Voltage When the power supply voltage value of the MCU is less than the value indicated in the recommended operating conditions, the MCU may not operate normally and perform unstable operation. In a system where the power source voltage drops slowly when the power source voltage drops or the power is turned off, reset the MCU when the power source voltage is less than the recommended operating conditions, and design the system so that this unstable operation does not cause errors to it. Notes on Handling Power Source Pins Before using the MCU, connect a capacitor suitable for high frequencies as a bypass capacitor between the following: The power source pin (VCC pin) and the GND pin (VSS pin) The power source pin (VCC pin) and the analog power source input pin (AVSS pin). As a bypass capacitor, a ceramic capacitor of 0.01 F to 0.1 F is recommended. Also, use the shortest possible wiring to connect a bypass capacitor between the power source pin and the GND pin and between the power source pin and the analog power source pin. Notes on Memory 1. RAM The RAM content is undefined at a reset. Be sure to set the initial value before use.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 128 of 131
38D2 Group
Notes on QzROM Version Wiring to OSCSEL pin (1) OSCSEL = L Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VS S pin of the microcomputer. (2) OSCSEL = H Connect the OSCSEL pin the shortest possible to the VCC pattern which is supplied to the VCC pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k resistor in series to the VCC could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the VC C p a t t e r n w h i c h i s s u p p l i e d t o t h e V C C p i n o f t h e microcomputer. The OSCSEL pin is the power source input pin for the built-in QzROM. When programming in the QzROM, the impedance of the OSCSEL pin is low to allow the electric current for writing to flow into the built-in QzROM. Because of this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the OSCSEL pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from the QzROM, which may cause a program runaway.
Termination of OSCSEL pin (1) OSCSEL = L
(1)
QzROM Version Product Shipped in Blank As for the product shipped in blank, Renesas does not perform the writing test to user ROM area after the assembly process though the QzROM writing test is performed enough before the assembly process. Therefore, a writing error of approximate 0.1% may occur. Moreover, please note the contact of cables and foreign bodies on a socket, etc. because a writing environment may cause some writing errors. Ordering QzROM Writing 1. Notes On QzROM Writing Orders When ordering the QzROM product shipped after writing, submit the mask file (extension: .msk) which is made by the mask file converter MM. * Be sure to set the ROM option data* setup when making the mask file by using the mask file converter MM.. The ROM code protect is specified according to the ROM option data* in the mask file which is submitted at ordering. Note that the mask file which has nothing at the ROM option data* or has the data other than "0016", "FE16" and "FF16" can not be accepted. * Set "FF16" to the ROM code protect address in ROM data regardless of the presence or absence of a protect. When data other than "FF16" is set, we may ask that the ROM data be submitted again. * ROM option data: mask option noted in MM 2. Data Required for QzROM Ordering The following are necessary when ordering a QzROM product shipped after writing: * QzROM Writing Confirmation Form* * Mark Specification Form* * ROM data: Mask file * For the QzROM writing confirmation form and the mark specification form, refer to the "Renesas Technology Corp." Homepage (http://www.renesas.com/homepage.jsp). Note that we cannot deal with special font marking (customer's trademark etc.) in QzROM microcomputer.
(2) OSCSEL = H
(1)
The shortest VCC about 5 k
The shortest
OSCSEL
about 5 k OSCSEL
VSS
(1)
The shortest
(1)
The shortest
Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin
Fig. 106 Wiring for OSCSEL pin
Overvoltage in QzROM Version Make sure that voltage exceeding the VCC pin voltage is not applied to other pins. In particular, ensure that the state indicated by bold lines in figure below does not occur for pin OSCSEL pin (VPP power source pin for QzROM) during power-on or poweroff. Otherwise the contents of QzROM could be rewritten.

1.8V VCC pin voltage
(1)
(2)
1.8V

OSCSEL pin voltage "H" input OSCSEL pin voltage "L" input
(1) Input voltage to other MCU pins rises before VCC pin voltage. (2) Input voltage to other MCU pins falls after VCC pin voltage. Note: The internal circuitry is unstable when VCC is below the minimum voltage specification of 1.8 V (shaded portion), so particular care should be exercised regarding overvoltage.
Fig. 107 Timing Diagram (Bold-lined periods are applicable)

3. QzROM Product Receiving Procedure When writing to QzROM is performed by user side, the receiving inspection by the following flow is necessary.
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 129 of 131
38D2 Group
QzROM product shipped after writing
"protect disabled" "protect enabled to the protect area 1"
Renesas
QzROM product shipped in blank
Renesas
Programming
Shipping User
Verify test
Shipping User
Receiving inspection (Blank check)
Receiving inspection of unprotected area (Verify test)
Programming
Programming to unprotected area
Verify test for all area
Verify test for unprotected area
Fig. 108 QzROM receiving procedure
Notes on Flash Memory Version CPU Rewrite Mode 1. Operating Speed
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 130 of 131
38D2 Group
During CPU rewrite mode, set the system clock 4.0 MHz or less using the main clock division ratio selection bits (bits 6 and 7 of address 003B16). 2. Prohibited Instructions The instructions which refer to the internal data of the flash memory cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode. 3. Interrupts The interrupts cannot be used during the CPU rewrite mode because they refer to the internal data of the flash memory. 4. Watchdog Timer In case of the watchdog timer has been running already, the internal reset generated by watchdog timer underflow does not happen, because of watchdog timer is always clearing during program or erase operation. 5. Reset Reset is always valid. In case of CNVSS = "H" when reset is released, boot mode is active. So the program starts from the address contained in address FFFC16 and FFFD16 in boot ROM area. CNVSS Pin The CNVSS pin determines the flash memory mode. Connect the CNVSS pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VSS pin of the microcomputer. In addition connecting an approximately 5 k. resistor in series to the GND could improve noise immunity. In this case as well as the above mention, connect the pin the shortest possible to the GND pattern which is supplied to the VS S pin of the microcomputer.
Note. When the boot mode or the standard serial I/O mode is used, a switch of the input level to the CNVSS pin is required.
(1)
The shortest
CNVSS Approx. 5k VSS
(1)
The shortest
Note 1: It shows the microcomputer's pin.
Fig. 109 Wiring for CNVSS pin
Rev.3.02 Apr 10, 2008 REJ03B0177-0302
Page 131 of 131
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. 1.00 2.00 Date Page Jan. 23, 2006 Mar. 24, 2006
-
38D2 Group Datasheet
Description Summary First edition issued FEATURES : Description of reset circuit eliminated and Power source voltage revised. Performance overview: Oscillation frequency and Power source voltage revised. FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM : Description of reset circuit eliminated. Fig. 4 and Table 3 38D29GC, 38D29G8 added. Fig. 9 Memory map diagram revised. Table 7 Non-port function of port P54-P57 revised. Related SFRs of port P40 and P41 revised. Fig. 15 (18) Port P61 revised. Fig. 22 Timer 12 mode register revised. Notes on Timer X: (1), (2) revised.
1 3 4 7 12 15 18 26 29 32 36 38 42 48 49 50 51 53 54 55 56 60 65-75
* Real Time Port Control revised.
Fig. 32 UART control register revised. Fig. 34 Note 1 revised. Fig. 38 Note 2 revised. Fig. 46 Memory map revised. Note 1 revised. Clock output function revised. Reset circuit revised. (1)Stop mode: Description revised. Fig. 58 SOURCE added. Fig. 60 State transitions of system clock: Note 3 revised. Address of oscillation ouput control register revised. Fig. 64 Connection of XIN and XOUT revised. Electrical characteristics added. DESCRIOTION revised Power dissipation described. Main clock / Sub-clock generating circuits: Built-in feed back resistor Built-in Power dissipation described. AVSS: GND input pin Analog power source input pin ROM and ROM Code Protect Address : Description revised. Fig. 9 is revised. Table 7 : As for CKOUT, non-port function and related SFRs are added. Termination of unused pins : As for I/O ports, description added. VL3 : Terminations 1 and 2 revised. Timer 1, Timer 2 : Description revised. Timer X : Description revised. Fig. 24 : TXCON1 bit 5 = 1 TXCON1 bit 5 = 0 Timer Y : Description revised. Fig. 26 : Note added. Fig. 33 : Note and source added.
2.01
Nov. 15, 2006
1 3 5 12 15 19 25 28 29 31 37
(1/4)
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. 2.01 Date Page Nov. 15, 2006 42
38D2 Group Datasheet
Description Summary LCD Power Circuit * Description added * Fig. 38 : Note 3 eliminated * Fig. 39 : Bit name described Fig. 46 : Reserved ROM area address revised. ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION : Description added. Fig. 48 : On-chip oscillator On-chip oscillator/4 Note added. Fig. 49 : On-chip oscillator On-chip oscillator/4 source/1024 Count sorce/1024 source/4 Count sorce/4 (5) Low-speed Mode : Description added Fig. 58 : Note added and circuit expression is revised. Fig. 61 : Circuit expression is revised. Table 12: As for VREF and AVSS, function revised. Fig. 63 to Fig. 66 added and revised. Table 17 IIH and IIL : OSCSEL added. Table 23: Note revised. Flash memory version function: added DESCRIPTION: flash memory version contents added FEATURES: flash memory version contents added Power source voltages: flash memory version contents added Power dissipation: flash memory version contents added Flash memory mode: added Fig. 1: Note is added Table 1: Power source voltage: revised and flash memory version contents added Power dissipation: flash memory version contents added Table 2: LED0 to 7 and KW0 to 3 are added to pin name Pin discription table is divided (to Table 2 and Table 3) Table 3: CNVSS pin is added Fig. 3: F (Flash memory) is added to memory type Flash memory size is added Fig. 4: Some "Under developing" are erased Table 3: Flash memory version products are added Table 5 "Differences between QzROM and flash memory versions" and "Notes on Differences between QzROM and Flash Memory Versions" are added Fig. 6: "Push contents of processor status register on stack" position is moved CPU mode register explanation is revised Fig. 7: Some notes are added Fig. 8: Flash memory version flow is added Fig. 9: Flash memory version SRF is added Fig. 10: Flash memory version SRF and notes are added Table 2: LED0 to 7 and KW0 to 3 are added to pin name "Interrupt" is wholly revised "Frequency Divider for Timer" is revised "Frequency Divider for Timer" is revised
48 49
53 54 56 57 59 to 62 71 75 3.01 Sep.18, 2007
-
1
2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 15 16 17 19 24-28 32 35
(2/4)
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. 3.01 Date Page Sep.18, 2007 35 36 37 38 39 44 45 56
38D2 Group Datasheet
Description Summary "(6) Pulse Width Measurement Mode" is revised "(3) Write To Timer X" is revised "(7) When Timer X Pulse Width Measurement Mode Used" "(5) Real Time Port Control" is added "Notes on Timer Y" is revised "Conparator and Control Circuit" is revised Fig. 37: Revised "ADKEY Control Circuit" is revised "Initial value of watchdog timer" is revised "Bit 6 of Watchdog Timer Control Register" and "" are revised Fig. 51: Revised Fig. 52: Revised Fig. 54: Revised "[RRF register (RRFR)]" is added Explaination is revised Fig. 56: revised Fig. 57: Notes are added Fig. 58: Revised Explanation is revised Fig. 61: Revised Fig. 62: Revised Table 14: Revised "Flash Memory Mode" is added Revised to "Notes on Use" from "Notes on Programming" contents Added "NOTES on QzROM VERSION" Added "NOTES on FLASH MEMORY VERSION" and "NOTES ON DIFFERENCES BETWEEN QzROM VERSION AND FLASH MEMORY VERSION" Table 21: Revised Table 22 to 29: "VSS=0V" are added to condition Table 22: VIL of XCIN is deleted Table 25: "VCC = 4.0 t o 5.0 V" "VCC = 1.8 to 5.5 V" Table 28:
* ABS of 10bitAD mode "2.2V < VCC 4.0V" "2.2V VCC 4.0V" * ABS of 8bitAD mode "2.2V < VCC 4.0V" "2.2V VCC 4.0V"
57 58
59 60 62 63 65 71-88 89 90 91 94 95-101 95 98 100
"1.8V VCC 5.5V" "2.0V VCC 5.5V" "1.8V VCC 5.5V" "2.0V VCC 5.5V"
* tCONV is separated to 10bitAD mode and 8bitADmode, and note is added
102
Table 30: TC, TwH, and TwL of XIN "4.5 V to 5.5 V" "4.5V VCC 5.5V" "4.0 V to 5.5 V" "4.0V VCC 5.5V" Table 31: TC of XIN and CNTR, and TwH and TwL of XIN "2.0V < VCC 4.0V" "2.0V VCC 4.0V" "VCC 2.0V" "VCC < 2.0V" Fig. 95: XCIN timing is deleted Flash memory version electrical characteristics is added
104 105-115
(3/4)
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. 3.01 3.02 Date Page Sep.18, 2007 Apr. 09, 2008 118-131 2 3 5 18 21 23 25 26 29 34 38 44 49 57 58 63 64 65 66 74 85 86 90 95 99 102 109 110 129 Appendix is added Fig. 1: Revised Table 1: Revised Table 2: Revised
38D2 Group Datasheet
Description Summary
"Direction Registers": Peripheral output name is added and deleted Fig. 14: Revised Table 9: Revised "External Interrupt Pin Selection" is deleted Fig. 17:Revised Port name is revised Fig. 26: Revised "Timer Y" is revised Fig. 36: Revised Fig. 41: Revised Fig. 53 and 54 are revised Fig. 56: Revised Fig. 63: Revised Fig. 63: Revised Table 14: Revised Fig. 65: Revised Fig. 73: Revised Fig. 80: Revised Fig. 81: Revised Notes On ROM Code Protect is revised Table 22: Revised Table 27: Revised Table 30: Revised NOTE of Table 38: Revised Table 40: Revised Notes On ROM Code Protect is revised
(4/4)
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
Notes: 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7858/7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2377-3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 3518-3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145
http://www.renesas.com
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
(c) 2008. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Colophon .7.2


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of M38D23G2XXXHP

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X